1660SM31 Oper Ed01

All rights reserved.
Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Alcatel 1660SM Rel.3.1
957.140.602 V Ed.01
OPERATORS HANDBOOK
STM 16 Multiservice Metro Node
VOL. 1/1
3AL 80755 BAAA Ed.01
957.140.602 V Ed.01
END OF DOCUMENT
3AL 80755 BAAA Ed.01
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1660SM REL.3.1 C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Norms and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Use of the CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3 CDROM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4 CDROM updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 7 11 11 13 15 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 19 19 20 20 20
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
020520 DATE CHANGE NOTE
S.MAGGIO ITAVE C. FAVERO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY 1660SM REL.3.1
P.GHELFI ITAVE ORIGINATOR
ED
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ED
01
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 1 / 20
957.140.602 V
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

Table 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . . Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. Handbooks related to IP specific product SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7. Optional handbooks common to 16xxSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 8 8 8 9 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 1.1 General information

WARNING ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. NOTICE The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL. COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases: PRODUCT 1660SM PRODUCT 1660SM RELEASE Rel.3.1 VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N 3AL 36301 AAAA ANV P/N 3AL 80622 AAAA FACTORY P/N 521.203.300 FACTORY P/N 521.535.200
For further information on the Alcatel software product and its physical distribution support refer to the Introduction section. N.B. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1.3 Purpose of the handbook

This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that the operators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook (see para. 1.2 on page 3). This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook ( see Table 1. on page 7) and the 1320CT associated documentation ( see Table 5. on page 8) does not replicate information contained into it. In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from the Technical Handbook. When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know: the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment (product-release) this handbook refers to. how to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1.4 Handbook configuration check

This handbook is a collection of documents (each contained in a specific section) that can have editions different from one another. The Edition of the whole handbook is that of section 1 (HANDBOOK GUIDE). The edition of the enclosed documents indicated in the following table is that of the corresponding original internal document. HANDBOOK EDITION REGISTER AND SECTION TITLE 1 2 3 4 5 HANDBOOK GUIDE INTRODUCTION MANUAL NE MANAGEMENT MANUAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL SIBDL MANUAL 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 03 04 05
SECTION EDITION
1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 Ed.01 issued on May, 2002 is the first released and validated version of the handbook, associated to product release 3.1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 80755 BA AA
20
6 / 20
2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook. Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this Handbook. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 3 consists of the following handbooks: Table 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware REF HANDBOOK 1660SM Rel.3.1 Technical Handbook [1] Provide information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance, Hardware setting documentation. 1660SM Rel.3.1 Installation Handbook [2] Provide information regarding Equipment Installation, according to AInstallation Engineering Dept. rules. 1660SM Rel.3.1 Turnup & Commissionig Handbook 3AL 80755 CAAA 955.110.582 Z ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. 955.110.572 E THIS HDBK
3AL 80755 AAAA
3AL 80755 DAAA
955.110.592 T
[3]
Provide information regarding Equipment TurnOn, Test and Operation, according to AInstallation Engineering Dept. rules. Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control REF HANDBOOK 1660SM Rel.3.1 CT Operators Handbook ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. 957.140.602 V THIS HDBK
3AL 80755 BAAA
[4]
Provides 1660SM SDH Craft Terminal screens and operational procedures
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW THIS HDBK or note
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
[5]
ATM Rel.1.1 Operators Handbook ATM Rel.1.2 Operators Handbook
3AL 80730 AAAA
957.140.552 J
[6]
3AL 80814 AAAA
957.140.652 W
Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures
Table 4. Handbooks related to IP specific product SW FACTORY Part No. THIS HDBK or note
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
[7]
IP Rel.1.0 Operators Handbook
3AL 81062 AAAA
957.140.722 L
Provides IP Terminal screens and operational procedures Table 5. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform THIS HDBK OR NOTE
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
1320CT Basic Operators Handbook [8]
3AL 79186 AAAA
957.130.542 E
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. 1330AS Rel.5.1 Operators Handbook [9] 3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. Information about Historical Alarms an Network Element Symbols Management ( Physical Network Management) are not valid for Craft Terminal. They are only used by Network Management. ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 E
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[10]
Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
FACTORY Part No.
Table 6. Documentation on CDROM See para. 5.5 on page 19

REF
CDROM TITLE 1660SM Rel.3.1 CDROMDOC EN
ANV Part No. 3AL 80761 AAAA
FACTORY Part No. 417.100.064
[11]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[1] and [4] N.B. Handbooks REF.[2] and [3] are available only on paper support. 3AL 79549 AAAA 417.100.031
1320CT BASIC CDROMDOC EN [12]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [8] to [10] ATM 1.1 CDROMDOC EN [13] Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [5] ATM 1.2 CDROMDOC EN [14] Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [6] IP 1.0 CDROMDOC EN [15] Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [7] 3AL 81063 AAAA 417.100.084 3AL 80815 AAAA 417.100.068 3AL 80739 AAAA 417.100.060
Table 7. Optional handbooks common to 16xxSM REF HANDBOOK S916xxSM System Installation Handbook [16] Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family equipment in the S9 Rack . Optinex RACK16xxSM System Installation Handbook [17] Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family equipment in the Optinex Rack . N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No. 955.100.692 N
THIS HDBK
3AL 78901 AAAA
3AL 38207 AAAA
955.110.202 L
Handbooks REF.[16] and [17] are available only on paper support.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 80755 BA AA
20
10 / 20
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS 3.1 First aid for electric shock
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened. Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately. TREATMENT OF BURNS This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present). WARNING: Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts; Apply dry gauze on the burns; Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method

Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his mouth (dentures, chewinggum etc.), Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put a hand under the patients head and one under his neck (see fig.) Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far as possible Shift the hand from the patients neck to is chin: place your thumb between his chin and his mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers closed together (see fig.). While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open.
With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the patients chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first even when the patients nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must be kept sloping backwards as much as possible. Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
3.2 Norms and labels

Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATELs designed and manufactured equipment to obtain the following information: COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. SAFETY RULES General rules Harmful optical signals Risk of explosion Moving mechanical parts Heatradiating Mechanical Parts
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD) EQUIPMENT LABELS
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs, loaded with software applicative described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructors technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE
3AL 80755 BA AA
20
14 / 20
4 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION
This handbook is composed of the following Manuals:
SECTION 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE (This document) The Handbook Guide gives general information on the application and use of the Handbook. The Handbook Guide includes the following chapters: Chapter 1: Handbook structure and configuration check. This chapter gives information on the whole handbook application, composition and evolution. Chapter 2: Product-release handbooks. This chapter lists the handbooks the Operator should have in order to carry out the tasks allowed by the specific productrelease this handbook refers to. Chapter 3: Safety norms and labels Chapter 4: Handbook description Chapter 5: General on Alcatel Customer Documentation SECTION 2: INTRODUCTION Manual The Introduction Manual describes the main features of the graphical interface and provides a general overview of the system architecture and the different functionalities provided by the Craft Terminal. The Introduction Manual includes the following chapters: Chapter 1: Introduction. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. Chapter 2: General description of the Craft Terminal. The Craft Terminal is introduced and the software product listed. The Craft Terminal main functionality in the NE management (EMLUSM) are listed and briefly described. Chapter 3: Acronyms and abbreviations. The acronyms used in all the operator manuals are listed. Chapter 4: Glossary of terms. Definitions concerning the acronyms. SECTION 3: NETWORK ELEMENT MANAGEMENT Manual The aim of this document is to describe the Craft Terminal view, inserting operative information. The Network Element Manual includes the following chapters: Chapter 1: Introduction. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. Chapter 2: General introduction on views and menus. The view organization is presented and the menus available listed and briefly described. Chapter 3: NE management supervision. This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access. Chapter 4: NE management general configuration. In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (CT access, NE Time, Alarm Configuration etc). Chapter 5: Security Management. In this chapter configuration referred to the Security management are described (ACD level and Manager list). Chapter 6: External input and output points management. This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). Chapter 7: Diagnosis management. In this chapter are specified: access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition, abnormal condition list (as result of operators command), access to the Event and Alarm Log file and Internal Link Monitor. Chapter 8: Communication and Routing management. In this chapter are presented the communication and routing parameters, concerning the OSI and IP communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network Chapter 9: Equipment management. This chapter deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. Chapter 10: Board view. This chapter permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol), to access the port view and to change the physical interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Chapter 11: Port view. This chapter permits to set and show the transmission resources referred to the Port. Chapter 12: Equipment protection management. This chapter permits to manage the EPS protection, setting the relevant configuration. Chapter 13: Multiplex Section protection management. This chapter permits to manage the MSP protection. Chapter 14: Transmission view. This chapter permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. Chapter 15: Cross connection management. This chapter permits to manage the connection of the paths. Chapter 16: Overhead management. This chapter permits to manage the Overhead, setting the relevant configuration. Chapter 17: Performance Monitoring management. This chapter permits to set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. Chapter 18: Synchronization management. This chapter permits to set and show Synchronization parameters and status. Chapter 19: MSSPRing Management. This chapter permits to set the MSSPRing protection of the NE Chapter 20: ATM/IP/ETH Configuration. This chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM/IP/ETH boards creation and the ATM/IP/ETH TTPs creation. Chapter 21: Software management. This chapter permits to update the NE by means download procedure and to manage NE software.
SECTION 4: NETWORK ELEMENT MAINTENANCE Manual This document aims at introducing the Maintenance procedure, inserting information useful to identify alarms and troubleshoot the NE. The Maintenance Manual includes the following chapters: Chapter 1: Introduction. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. Chapter 2: Maintenance introduction. List the maintenance steps. Chapter 3: Maintenance of the Personal Computer. The Personal Computer manual is referred. Chapter 4: Problems with Craft terminal. Shutdown and restart of the PC is indicated. Chapter 5: Troubleshooting (Corrective Maintenance). Detection location and correction of failure are presented. Chapter 6: Unit replacement with spare. The replacement procedure is detailed. Chapter 7: Upgrading with New Hardware. The Hardware upgrading procedure is detailed. Chapter 8: FLASH card substitution. The FLASH card substitution procedure is detailed.
SECTION 5: SIBDL Manual This document describes the download procedure with SIBDL. The SIBDL Manual includes the following chapters: Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Download with SIBDL configuration Chapter 3: Configuration for SIBDL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION 5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performance and services for which it is meant. A product evolves through successive product-releases which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. So, a productrelease defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole, identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific product-release has been designed, engineered and marketed for. In some cases a product-release has further development steps, named versions, that are born to improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing purposes. A product-release has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more handbooks. A new version of a product-release may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer Documentation set, as described in para.5.4 on page 18.
5.2 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to. The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent. Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not described here). Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment according to AlcatelTelecom Laboratory design choices. In particular the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it. Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4 Handbook Updating

The handbooks associated to the productrelease are listed in para.2 on page 7. Each handbook is identified by: the name of the product-release (and version when the handbook is applicable to the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones), the handbook name, the handbook P/N, the handbook edition (usually first edition=01), the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production. 5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons: only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook. the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In this case: the table in para.1.4 on page 5 indicates the section(s) edition change; in each section, the main changes with respect to the previous edition are listed; in affected chapters of each section, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged. 5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to commercial criteria. By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged). 5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM

In the following CDROM means Customer Documentation on CDROM
5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM In most cases, a CDROM contains the documentation of one productrelease(version) and for a certain language. In some other cases, the same CDROM can contain the documentation of different productrelease(version)s for a certain language. As a general rule: CDROMs for Network Management products do not contain: the Installation Guides the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main applicative SW.
CDROMs for Network Elements products do not contain the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment).
A CDROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and processing them by InterleafWorldViewPress after the manual addition of some hyperlinks which make the navigation through the various handbooks easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the CDROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper. The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where the viewer (InterleafWorldView) is added and a master CDROM is recorded. Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product. After a complete functional check, the CDROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the Production Department, so that the CDROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.5.2 Use of the CDROM The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments. The minimum configuration for World View (rel.2.2.2) utilization on a PC is: Operative System: Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 Processor: Pentium RAM: 32 Mbyte Disk space: 20Mbyte
The setup procedure is present in the booklet included in the CDROM box. After the setup procedure, which installs the viewer in the PC or Unix WS environment, the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools included in the viewer, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer. N.B. Copyright notification Copyright 19811996 INTERLEAF Inc. All rights reserved. The use of WorldView is permitted only in association with the files contained in the CDROMs officially supplied by Alcatel. All rights reserved. Passing and copying of documents and files contained in the CDROMs officially supplied by Alcatel, use and communication of its contents are not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
WorldView:
Alcatel documents:
5.5.3 CDROM identification Each CDROM is identified: 1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CDROM upper surface: the name of the productrelease(s) (and version when the CDROM is applicable to the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones), a writing indicating the language(s), the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N 417.xxx.xxx x and ANV P/N), the CDROM edition (usually first edition=01) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.
2)
5.5.4 CDROM updating The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in previous para.5.5.3 point 2 ) , in association with the CDROMs own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem as a structured list. Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system, the AlcatelInformationSystem automatically rises a warning toward the Customer Documentation department, indicating the list of CDROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents. This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM. Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT ED
01 SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 20 / 20
957.140.602 V
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Reading rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Software product and licences description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Software products and licences list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Network Element management supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Network Element general configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 Security Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.4 External input and output point management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.5 Diagnosis management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.6 Communication and routing management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.7 Equipment and board management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.8 Port management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.9 Protection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.10 Transmission management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.11 Cross Connection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.12 Performance monitoring management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.13 Synchronization management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.14 ATM/IP/ETH Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.15 Software management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 6 6 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 13
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S.MAGGIO ITAVE C. FAVERO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY 1660SMCREL.3.1
ED
ED
01
SC.2:INTRODUCTION 3AL 80755 BA AA 18 1 / 18
957.140.602 V

Table 1. Software products part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Software licence part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Scope

1.1.1 Document scope The Introduction Manual present the Craft Terminal main functions and provides a general overview of the different functionalities provided by the ELMUSM of the Craft Terminal for Info Model NE. 1.1.2 Target audience The Introduction Manual is intended for all users. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook
1.2 Reading rules

1.2.1 Menu options All the manuals describe menus, but not necessarily all the options of these menus. When a menu option is not detailed in a manual, the information are surely given in another manual.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.2:INTRODUCTION
3AL 80755 BA AA
18
4 / 18
2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL 2.1 Introduction

The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements, providing ITU compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element. Multiple NE management up to 32 Network element is possible obtaining a remote Craft Terminal application. The general information of the Craft Terminal are presented in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, that the operator have to read before this Handbook. In the Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook are described all the general description of use, login, navigation, rules, etc, common to all the NE using the same Craft Terminal. Further, the same handbook contains the detailed description of common operations as Installation and common screens as Network Element Synthesis view. The Network Element Synthesis view is the first view presented to the operator entering the application. Starting from this view it is possible login the NE and than enter the EMLUSM views. This Operators Handbook deals with the EMLUSM views of the Craft Terminal, which directly permit to manage the Network Element. The management main functions of the EMLUSM are inserted at para. 2.3 on page 8. A detailed description of the EMLUSM screens is given in Section Ne Management of this handbook. From the Craft Terminal is possible to run other Specific Software application. These applications are in charge of the ATM and IP management inside the NE such as ATM/IP crossconnection, Backup and Restore configuration files etc. Details information about Specific Application are described in the relevant Operators Handbook (see Section 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE for the code). The list and part numbers of the SDH software products distributed by Alcatel is inserted in para.2.2 on page 6. The Craft Terminal characteristic (computer configuration) are listed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2 Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer

2.2.1 Software product and licences description The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CDROM. In this CDROM are contained: Software packages for NE management by means of the craft terminal Software package of the NE, to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of download function)
The software package used for management permits the dialogue between craft terminal and NE, to realize all the functions of the NES and EMLUSM ). The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on the NE, thus following product evolution. Alcatel typically offers several software licences on the software product (only one for this equipment) They are referred both to the Network Element software features and to the Craft Terminal software features.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.2 Software products and licences list and part numbers Every Software Product is identified by a denomination and a part number, listed on the following table.
Table 1. Software products part numbers
Name SWP 1660SM R 3.1 CDROM
ANV Part Number 3AL 80676 AA
Factory Part Number 415.100.664 L
N.B.
Every Software licence is identified by a denomination and a part number, listed on the following table. Table 2. Software licence part numbers
Name SWLA POINT 60SM Rel. 3.1 LICENCE FEE / STM1 SWLB POINT 60SM Rel. 3.1 LICENCE FEE / STM1 SWLC POINT 60SM Rel. 2.1 LICENCE FEE / STM1 SWLLCT 1660SM Rel. 2.1 LICENCE FEE SWLRCT 1660SM Rel 2.1 LICENCE FEE N.B. 1
ANV Part Number
Factory Part Number 700.200.306 U
N.B.
3AL 80629 AA
3AL 80630 AA
700.200.307 V
3AL 80631 AA 3AL 80632 AA 3AL 80633 AA
700.200.308 E 700.200.309 F 700.200.310 T
1 2 2
Licence alternative for Network Element software features: SWLA: full functionality set SWLB: improved functionality set SWLC: basic functionality set Licence alternative for Craft Terminal software features: SWLLCT: local Craft Terminal functionality SWLRCT: remote Craft Terminal functionality
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.3 Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management

In this chapter, are described the main functionalities of the Craft Terminal, referred to the Network Element management views, obtained by means EMLUSM. The functionalities constitute the heading of each of the paragraphs below. 2.3.1 Network Element management supervision Deals with the NE state and access. 2.3.2 Network Element general configuration Deals with the general configuration of the equipment. Craft Terminal access state (allow or inhibit) NE Time management Alarms Configuration Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management, Allow/Inhibit alarm notification, Alarm resynchronization. Restart NE
2.3.3 Security Management Deals with the security configuration of the equipment. Set Manager list Set ACD level
2.3.4 External input and output point management Deals with housekeeping signals input from the external (station alarms) or forwarded (output) towards the external. Display External points Configure External points
2.3.5 Diagnosis management For real time alarm reporting and subsequent fault localization and correction. Alarm Surveillance The alarms concerning a particular managed entity will be represented in a synthetic way in all the views concerning the entity. Alarms information are detailed in the Alarms Surveillance Manual
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Abnormal Condition list ( as result of operators commands) Event log Manager Permits to have access to the Event Log file. Remote Inventory (upload and view remote inventory) Internal Link Monitor
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.3.6 Communication and routing management This deals with the configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE. Different types of protection can be managed: Local NE and OS addresses NTP configurations LAPD, Ethernet, MESA, RAP configurations IP Configuration Tunneling Configuration
2.3.7 Equipment and board management Deals with the presentation of the equipment and the hierarchical tree structure, permitting to define the types of boards present. The Board view permits to access the Port view. Set / modify / remove boards or subracks Software information of the selected board. Remote Inventory
2.3.8 Port management This permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred only to the port (SDH PDH, HOA, ATM and IP). It is used to check the detailed alarm of each TP and to configure them (many options are the same of the Transmission view). For each port a specific menu is available where various configuration of the specific port can be set, for example: Automatic Laser Shutdown MSP protection Loopback management and configuration Single fiber configuration TP Frame Mode Configuration Retiming Ethernet port configuration Port view is also the entry point of other management functions : Performance Monitoring management Cross Connection management
For each port are presented: the various ITUT functional blocks (i.e. PPI, RST, VC4). details of alarm and state condition TP role, connection, etc. information
2.3.9 Protection management This deals with the protection mechanism that is possible to configure in the NE. Different types of protection can be managed: Equipment protection switching Multiple Section Protection MSSPRing Protection 2 fibers ( 4 fibers is not operative in current release) 01 SC.2:INTRODUCTION 3AL 80755 BA AA 18 9 / 18
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
957.140.602 V
2.3.10 Transmission management This permits to cover the management of the transmission resources, opening the views of all the specific ports of the NE (SDH and PDH). It supply an overview of the complete signal flow. For all the ports are presented: the various ITUT functional blocks (i.e. PPI, RST, VC4). synthesis of alarm and state condition TP role, connection, etc. information
For each port a specific menu is available similar to the Port view where various configuration of the specific port can be set. Also Transmission view is than the entry point of other management functions . 2.3.11 Cross Connection management This deals with the connection of all the Termination Point (TP), which are the starting and terminating points of a transmission segment. In this way the multiplex structures are created, managing the traffic flow. Similar operation are made on the OverHead cross connections. Create / modify cross connections Activate / deactivate / switch cross connections
2.3.12 Performance monitoring management This function deals with the set up, collect, log and display performance data associated with the managed NE according ITUT G.826.It consists of a set of functions that evaluate and report on the behavior of the NEs and their effectiveness relating to the communications taking place on the Network. Set up the Performance Monitoring thresholds Collect and display Performance Monitoring data Performance Monitoring history
2.3.13 Synchronization management Deals with the management of the timing. Timing source, SSU, T0, T4,T5 and T6 configuration Protection commands
2.3.14 ATM/IP/ETH Configuration Describes the operations necessary for the ATM/IP/ETH boards and the ATM/IP/ETH TPs creation. 2.3.15 Software management Deals with the manipulation of the software package within NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Software download refers to the NE software, permitting to charge the software in the relevant NE to upgrade the NE software, thus following product evolution, or as a consequence of substitution with a spare. Backup and restore on the MIB of the NE. 01 SC.2:INTRODUCTION 3AL 80755 BA AA 18 10 / 18
ED
957.140.602 V
3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AIS: Alarm Indication Signal
APS: Automatic Protection Switching ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Module CDROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee CT: Craft Terminal DCN: Data Communications Network ECC: Embedded Communication Channels EML: Element Management Layer EPS: Equipment Protection Switching FAD: Functional Access Domain Gbit/s: Gigabits per second GNE: Gateway Network Element HMI: Human Machine Interface IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IM: Information Manager Kbit/s: Kilobits per second LAN: Local Area Network LVC: Lower Order Virtual Container MAC: Media Access Control Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds MIB: Management Information Base MS: Multiplex Section MSP: Multiplex Section Protection NAD: Network Access Domain NAP: Network Access Point
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NE: Network Element NML: Network Management Layer
ED
01
957.140.602 V
NTP: Network Time Protocol OS: Operation System PI: Physical Interface SD: Signal Degrade SF: Signal Failure TMN: Telecommunications Management Network TN: Telecommunications Network TP: Termination Point USM: User Service Manager XC: CrossConnection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Acknowledgment: When an alarm is taken into account by the application, the operator has to acknowledge it to point out that he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. During alarm configuration it is possible to set a maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. The operator can decide whether or not the alarm clear has to be acknowledged. Administrator: A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. Alarm: An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the state of an equipment or the CT. An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end. Alarm Severity Assignment Profile: Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes. Alarm Status: Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm. Board: A board is part of an NE. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE. Bridge: The action of transmitting identical traffic on both the working and protection trails. Bridge Request: A message sent from a tailend node to the headend node requesting that the headend perform a bridge of the working channels onto the protection channels. Bridge Request status: A message sent from a tailend node to all other nodes within the protection system indicating that the tailend has requested a bridge. Bridge&switch node: The node that performs the bridge and switch function for a protection event. Where the bridge and switch is performed on a per AU4 basis, the node executing a bridge and switch of at least one AU4 is referred to as a bridge and switch node. Note that with a Transoceanic application, a node in the switching status may not be a bridge&switch node, whereas a node in the passthrough state may be a bridge&switch node. With the Classic application, only a request node (see below) may be a bridge&switch node. Compact Disk Read Only Memory: Data saving support from which the information can only be read. Is useful for stocking data due to its available memory space. Craft Terminal: Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to an NE is possible. It can be used to configure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE. Crossconnection CrossConnections provide the network with the Routing Capabilities, this is the possibility of routing one signal to a particular destination. Digital Communication network: Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Embedded Communication Channel: Communication channel used in conjunction with packet commuting networks (X25) to manage distant SDH networks. These communication channels are related to the QECC* protocols. Element Management Layer: This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements. Equipment Protection Switching: Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card failure. Extra traffic: Traffic that is carried over the protection trail when it is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected and is preempted when the protection trail is required to protect the working traffic. Filter: They are related to the alarms or events generated on an NE or internally within the OS itself. They can be configured by an operator to reject specified types of notifications and limit the processing that is applied to them. Flushing: This deals with logs. When a log is flushed, all its records are deleted. Functional Access Domain: It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user. Gigabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 109 bits every second. Gateway Network Element: It is a Network Element devoted to the control, from the OS, of those NEs providing a QECC* interface. To do this it uses a QB3* interface and performs the conversion QB3* QECC*. Head End: Node executing the bridge (adjacent along the direction where a failure is present) Human Machine Interface: It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system. History Report: This function enables operators to get information concerning performances, security or alarms on entities composing the network, or on the network itself. The operator specifies the time period for which he requires the report. Idle: A node that is not generating, detecting or passingthrough bridge requests or bridge request status information. Intermediate node: The node that is not a request node. It is always in the passthrough state. If such a node executes bridge and switch of at least one AU4 it is also a bridge&switch node. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee: Standard organization for telecommunications. Now called the ITUT (International Telecommunication Union).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Isolated Node: A single node that is isolated from a traffic perspective by ring switches on each of its two spans by its adjacent nodes.
Kilobits per second: Unit that correspond to the transmission of 103 bits every second. Line Terminal: A line terminal is the end point of a communication link. it is used to transmit or receive signals. They can undertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signal to two different transmission media) or multiplexing/demultiplexing functions. Logs: Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications, operator commands and system alarms. The size of the log can be configured. Management Domain: The Craft Terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional proposes. Each management domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs. Media Access Control Address: Represents the Level 2 address for Local Area Networks. Megabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 106 bits every second. Misconnection: A condition in which traffic destined for a given node is incorrectly routed to another node and no corrective action has been taken. MSSPRing channels: The range of channels that are part of the MSSPRing operation (i.e. the whole of the working and protection channels). Multiplexer: Equipment used to combine several signals to produce a single signal at a higher transmission rate and to decompose it back to the smaller rate signals. Multiplex Section: In general, represents the section containing the multiplexed signals. Network Access Domain: Defined as a set of Network Elements. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a user can manage. Network Element: Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. Have characteristics compliant with CCITT recommendations. Network Management Level: Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network. Notification: Spontaneous data received by the system concerning an NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Operation System: A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way, using protocols and interfaces. it offers to the operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. The 1353SH is an Operation System. Operator: The enduser of the Craft Terminal. He supervises a part of the network that is dependant on his user profile. Path: According to ITUT Recommendation G.803, a path is a transport entity (i.e., architectural component) used to transfer information. Nevertheless, this name will be used throughout this document to indicate the information carried either unidirectionally or bidirectionally between two access points of a ring on either a path link connection (if the two points are both PDH) or trail segment. Physical Interface: Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouples the line signals and adapt the form of signal for further transmission. This functional block also manages clock extraction, signal loss monitoring and loopback functions. Port: A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. A port is either a termination point or an origination point. Protocol request: A message sent by a node to another node via K1/K2 bytes with the purpose of settling a certain behavior. All the K1 request codes represent protocol requests, but not all of them are bridge requests. For example, a SFR is a bridge request (see ITUT G841), but LPS is not: both of them are protocol requests. Even NR is a protocol request. Protocol reply: A message sent by a node to another node via K1/K2 bytes with the purpose of acknowledging a received protocol request. Protection trail: The trail allocated to transport the working traffic during a switch event. When there is a switch event, traffic on the affected working trail is bridged onto the protection trail. Protection section: The full set of both protection and (lower) unprotected channels in a multiplex section. Protection semisection: The part of multiplex section (i.e. the N/2+1..N channels in a 2fiber STMN NE) consisting of protection channels. Repeater: Equipment used to regenerate a signal when it has travelled a long distance. Request node: A node that generates either a protocol request or protocol reply (other than NR!). The pair of nodes sending each other protocol request/reply are peer request nodes. Severity: Linked to alarms, severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Shared protection: A protection architecture using m protection entities shared among n working entities (m:n). The protection entities may also be used to carry extra traffic when not used for protection.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Span: The set of multiplex sections between two adjacent nodes on a ring.
Span Switching: Protection mechanism similar to the MSP that applies only to fourfibre rings where working and protection channels are contained in separate fibres and the failure only affects the working channels. During a span switch, the working traffic is carried over the protection channel on the same span as failure. Squelched traffic: An all 1s signal resulting from the squelching process (insertion of AUAIS in order to guarantee the connections) Switch: The action of selecting traffic from the protection trail rather than the working trail. Switching Node: The node that performs the bridge or switch function for a protection event. In the case of a multiplex section switched ring network architecture, this node also performs any necessary squelching of misconnected traffic. Tail End: Node which detects the failure. Telecommunication Management Network: Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. They provide an organized network structure to achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process the information. Telecommunication Network: Describes the network to be managed. Provides the transmission, the transport and the switching supports to the interconnected Network Elements. Terminal Point: Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in an equipment. Is related to a port. Thresholding: This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters ( for example BIt Error Rates) that, when exceeded, generate trouble indications. Unprotected channels: See unprotected channel in ITUT G841. Each pair of unprotected channels is made up on one in the working (semi)section plus one in the protection (semi)section. Unprotected traffic: See unprotected traffic in ITUT G841. User Profile: Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. A finite number of predefined user profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality, the administrator must assign a profile to a UNIX user account by choosing one among the predefined profiles installed with Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
User Service Manager: These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interface and facilitate the interaction with the product.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Working channels: The channels over which working traffic is transported when there are no switch events. An APS system performs restoration for the working channels only. Working traffic: Traffic that is normally carried in a working trail, except in the event of a protection switch. Working trail: The trail over which working traffic is transported when there is no switch events. Working section: The full set of both working and (upper) unprotected channels in a multiplex section. Working semisection: The part of multiplex section (i.e. the 1..N/2 channels in a 2fiber STMN NE) consisting of working channels. Wrapping: Wrapping is the technique that enables the most recent entries in a file to replace the oldest when a file is full.
END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 EMLUSM view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Introduction on the EMLUSM menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Views menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5 MSSPRing menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6 Download menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.7 Equipment menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.8 Board menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.9 Port menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.10 EPS menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.11 Transmission menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.12 Synchronization menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.13 External Points menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Advices on Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 NE management states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 NE supervision and login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state . . . . . . . . 7 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 15 15 17 19 20 21 22 22 22 23 24 25 27 28 30 30 35 37 37 38 39 39 39 40
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ED
01
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 1 / 386
957.140.602 V
5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Set Manager list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Set ACD level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Displaying external points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Expanding or reducing external points list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 External points configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Alarms surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Internal Link Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Log Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.1 Upload remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.2 View Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Communication and routing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 OS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 LAPD Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10 IP Static Routing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.11 OSPF Area Table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12 IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13 ISA board IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.14 OSI over IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 IP over OSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Introduction and navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Set and change or remove board/subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Connect Fan to CONGI board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Board administrative state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1 Setting a board in service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2 Setting a board out of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53 53 54 55 56 58 59 63 63 65 67 68 69 69 70 73 73 73 74 75 75 76 78 80 81 82 85 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 97 97 101 103 105 105 105
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.2 NE Time management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Procedure to modify an ASAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5 Alarms resynchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Restart NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41 43 43 43 49 50 51 52
9.4.3 Consulting a Boards Administrative state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 9.5 Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 9.6 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 9.7 Show supporting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 10 BOARD VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Board View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 Port Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 Change Physical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.3 Show Supporting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 PORT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Port View: elements on the TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Port View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 Set Retiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 AU4 Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 Physical Media option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.2 Show Optical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.3 Single Fiber Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.4 Ms Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.5 Line Length Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.6 Ethernet Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 Show Supporting Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 Navigate to Transmission View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 Navigate to Monitoring View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 111 113 114 115 116 117 117 119 120 121 123 125 126 129 130 132 133 134 136 137 138
12 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 12.2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 12.3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 12.4 Switching EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 12.5 EPS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 13 MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 Architecture types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 MSP Options Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 MSP Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 MSP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.1 MSP modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MSP Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 Display of Protection State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 MSP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8 MSP overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 155 156 157 161 162 163 164 166 168
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
14 TRANSMISSION VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 14.2 View elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 14.3 View Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 14.3.1 View Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 14.3.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 14.3.3 Naming TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 14.3.4 Dynamic View Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.4 Transmission view access and menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 Add TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5.1 TP Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6 TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.1 High Order TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.2 J0 Section Trace management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.3 Low Order TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 TP Threshold Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.9 Terminate/Disterminate TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.9.1 Terminate TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.9.2 Disterminate TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10 Monitoring Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10.1 Creation/Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.10.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.11 Structure TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.12 Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.12.1 Loopback Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.12.2 Loopback Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.13 Physical Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.13.1 Set Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14 Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14.1 Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14.2 Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14.3 Show Supported Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14.4 Navigate to Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 CROSS-CONNECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.5 Cross-Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.6 Cross-Connection Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 Cross-Connections management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1 Search Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2 Cross-Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3 Actions available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.1 Cross-Connection Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.2 Create a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.3 Modify a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.1 Activate a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.3 Delete a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6.1 Split a Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6.2 Join Two Cross-Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7 Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9 Show Cross-Connected TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177 179 179 186 186 188 189 191 193 194 194 194 195 196 198 200 201 201 204 206 207 208 208 209 210 211 213 213 213 214 217 221 222 224 226 228 229 231 233 234 235 240 246 249 249 249 249 250 250 252 253 255 256
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
16 OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 16.2 OH Connection overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 16.3 Overhead views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 16.4 OH Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 16.5 OH TP creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 16.6 OH TP deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 16.7 OH Phone Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.2 Supported Performance Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.4 Bidirectional counting (24 h Bi) for QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.5 End to End (ee 24h) Performance Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.6 Performance Monitoring on AUPJE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.8 Performance Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.9 Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.10 Performance Monitoring History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.11 Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 Display Current Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Display History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 PM Threshold Table Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 PM Threshold Table Create / Modification / Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6.1 Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6.2 Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 Synchronization Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.1 Displaying the Synchronization View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.2 Synchronization View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.3 Timing Source Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.4 Synchronization Protection Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.6 SSU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.7 Remove Timing Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.8 Change T4 <> T5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.9 Change 2MHz >2Mbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.10 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.11 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.12 Show Timing Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 269 269 270 271 272 272 272 273 273 274 274 274 276 281 284 286 289 289 291 291 293 293 295 295 296 299 302 303 305 306 307 309 311 312 313
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
19 MSSPRING MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 19.1 MSSPRING introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 19.2 MSSPRING connection configuration advices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 19.2.1 2Fiber MSSPRING connection configuration advices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 19.3 Operative sequence to configure MSSPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 19.3.1 Operative sequence to configure 2Fiber MSSPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 19.4 MSSPRING Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
ED
01
957.140.602 V
20 ATM/IP/ETH CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 20.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 20.2 ATM/IP/ETH board TTPs creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 21 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Generalities and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1.1 Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Software download operative sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.1 Software Download upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.2 NE Software package installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3 Software Download Manager menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4 Init download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5 SW package Activation and Units information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6 Mib management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 371 372 373 373 373 380 381 383 385
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.4.1 MSSPRing Main Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.2 Squelching Table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.3 Activate, Deactivate and Delete commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5 MSSPRING Protection Status and Commands for 2 fiber terrestrial application . . 19.5.1 2F MSSPRing protection commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.2 External commands (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.3 2F MSSPRing dual protection commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.4 2F Protection Status Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319 325 331 332 332 334 342 347

FIGURES Figure 1. EMLUSM main view organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2. Menu options flow chart 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3. Menu options flow chart 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4. Menu options flow chart 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5. Menu options flow chart 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6. NE EMLUSM Main view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7. NE management: setting the access state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9. NE Time dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11. ASAPs Management dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12. ASAP Edition dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13. Set ASAP dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14. Set SdhNE Alarms Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 15. Inhibit alarm notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 16. Allow alarm notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 17. Alarm resynchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 18. Restart NE confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 19. Set Manager list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 20. Set ACD level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 21. Opening the external points view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 22. External points view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 23. Expanding or reducing the external points list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 24. Configuring external points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 25. External input point configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 26. External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 27. External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 28. Alarm Surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 29. Alarm Surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 30. Abnormal condition menu option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 31. Example of abnormal condition list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 32. Example of loopback dialog window management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 33. Internal Link Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 34. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 35. Remote Inventory confirmation request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 36. Remote Inventory completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 37. View Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 38. Routing subdomain organization example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 39. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 40. Comm/Routing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 41. Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 42. OS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 43. NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 44. LAPD Configuration dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 45. Creation LAPD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 46. Confirmation to change LAPD Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 47. Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 48. Ethernet Configuration L2 only parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 49. RAP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 50. MESA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
16 31 32 33 34 38 39 41 41 44 44 46 47 49 50 50 51 52 53 54 56 57 58 59 59 60 60 63 64 65 65 66 67 68 69 69 70 74 75 77 79 80 81 83 84 84 86 86 87 88
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 51. IP Static Routing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 52. OSPF Area Table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 53. IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 54. ISA Board IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 55. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 56. IP over OSI Tunneling configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 57. Equipment Overview Subrack level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 58. Equipment Overview Rack level (without Fans subrack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 59. Equipment Overview Rack level (with Fans subrack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 60. Equipment Overview Equipment level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 61. Equipment menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 62. The list of different boards/subrack relative to an NE slot (examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 63. Connect FAN to CONGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 64. Remove FAN connection from CONGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 65. Consulting a boards administrative state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 66. Software Description dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 67. Remote Inventory (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 68. Select Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 69. Select Output Format for file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 70. Equipment Overview Subrack level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 71. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 72. Example of a Board View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 73. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 74. Board menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 75. After Port Access selection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 76. Change Physical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 77. Subrack level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 78. Example of a Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 79. Termination TP box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 80. G.783 Adaptation TP box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 81. Examples of port menu options (SDH, PDH and ATM port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 82. Set Retiming enable (before) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 83. Set Retiming enable (after) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 84. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 85. Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 86. Example of a concatenated AU4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 87. Physical media menu (SDH port example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 88. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 89. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 90. ALS and Laser current state (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 91. Visualizing a port optical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 92. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 93. Single Fiber Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 94. Ms Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 95. PDH Line Length Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 96. Ethernet Port Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 97. Ethernet Port Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 98. Board View Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 99. After Navigate to Transmission view selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 100. View of Monitoring Operations (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 101. Consulting EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 102. EPS Management dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 103. EPS: board selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 104. EPS: choose protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89 90 91 92 93 95 98 98 99 99 100 101 103 104 105 106 107 108 108 109 111 112 112 113 114 115 116 118 119 119 120 121 122 123 124 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 140 140 143 143
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 105. EPS functional state from protected active board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 106. EPS functional state from protecting active board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 107. Configure EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 108. EPS Management dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 109. Switching EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 110. EPS Switch dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 111. EPS overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 112. EPS overview after Search (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 113. Subrack view after Open Subrack View command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 114. Board view after Open Board View command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 115. MSP Create Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 116. MSP Schema Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 117. MSP schema creation Port dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 118. TP Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 119. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 120. MSP N:1 standard protection schema (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 121. MSP Management Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 122. MSP Management View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 123. MSP Delete option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 124. MSP Schema Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 125. MSP Protection Status Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 126. MSP Commands option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 127. MSP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 128. MSP overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 129. MSP overview after Search (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 130. Port view after Open Port View command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 131. Symbols Used in Transmission View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 132. Transmission View Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 133. Transmission menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 134. TP Search Dialog, Initial State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 135. Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 136. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 137. TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 138. Symbols in TP Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 139. Board History Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 140. TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 141. Information... Dialog for Search Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 142. Print to Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 143. Print to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 144. Example Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 145. High Order TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 146. J0 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 147. Low Order TP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 148. TP Frame Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 149. Degraded Signal Threshold selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 150. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 151. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 152. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 153. Monitor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 154. Loopback configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 155. Port Loopbacks View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 156. Loopback Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 157. Set Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 158. Board View (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144 144 145 145 147 147 149 150 153 153 157 157 158 159 160 160 161 162 163 163 165 166 167 168 169 171 174 175 178 179 179 180 181 181 182 183 183 184 184 185 186 188 189 191 193 196 197 197 198 201 203 204 207 210
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 159. Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 160. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 161. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 162. SDH Transport Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 163. PDH Transport Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 164. Unidirectional Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 165. Bidirectional Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 166. Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 167. Protected Unidirectional Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 168. Bidirectional Connection Input Protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 169. Protected Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 170. Drop and Continue Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 171. Cross connection management cascade menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 172. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 173. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 174. Protection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 175. Cross-Connection Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 176. Creation of a Unidirectional, Non-Protected Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 177. Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 178. Search for Cross-Connection Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 179. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 180. Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 181. Unprotect a Bidirectional Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 182. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 183. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 184. Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 185. Protection Actions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 186. Select Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 187. Select Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 188. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 189. Overhead options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 190. Cross Connection Management for OverHead dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 191. Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 192. OH TP creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 193. OH Search TP for creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 194. OH TP deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 195. Phone Parameters dialog window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 196. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 197. PM Configuration Dialog (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 198. PM question dialog box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 199. Current PM Data Dialog (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 200. PM History Data Dialog (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 201. PM Threshold Table Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 202. Create PM Threshold Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 203. Modify PM Threshold Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 204. Internal organization of the SETS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 205. Obtaining the synchronization view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 206. Synchronization View Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 207. Synchronization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 208. Timing source configuration for crossconnect equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 209. Synch. source configuration for ADM equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 210. Lockout, Force and Manual commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 211. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 212. SSU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211 215 216 219 220 222 222 223 224 224 225 225 228 230 232 236 239 239 241 243 244 245 247 248 250 251 253 255 255 257 261 262 262 266 266 267 268 271 278 278 283 285 287 290 292 293 295 296 299 300 301 302 304 305
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 213. Synchronization source removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 214. Synchronization source removing confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 215. Change T4 <> T5 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 216. Change T4 <> T5 confirmation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 217. Change T4 <> T5: command execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 218. Change 2MHz >2Mbit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 219. Change 2MHz >2Mbit confirmation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 220. Change 2MHz >2Mbit: command execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 221. T4 equal T0 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 222. Transmission SSM Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 223. Show Timing Source (example with T2 reference source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 224. Display MSSPRing pull down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 225. MSSPRing Management dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 226. Creation Schema dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 227. Activated MSSPRing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 228. Node Id and associated ring node position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 229. Ring map configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 230. WTR dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 231. Example of error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 232. Squelching table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 233. Example of a ring traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 234. Connections of the ring of Figure 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 235. Squelching table of Node A, West side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 236. Squelching table of Node A, East side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 237. Squelching table of Node B, West side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 238. Squelching table of Node B, East side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 239. Squelching table of Node C, West side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 240. Squelching table of Node C, East side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 241. Squelching table of Node D, West side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 242. Squelching table of Node D, East side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 243. Confirmation message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 244. Protection states and commands Idle status (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 245. Ring Protection (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 246. Lockout commands (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 247. Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) Figure 248. Tailend / Headend association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 249. Tailend / headend protection with a lockout working and a one direction ring failure (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 250. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 251. Lockout command and nonserved failures (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 252. Forced and Manual commands (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 253. Manual and Force Ring command (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 254. Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 255. Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 256. Example of confirmation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 257. Clear WTR command (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 258. Ring network reference scheme (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 259. Examples of Double ring failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 260. 2F Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 261. Tail / head dual Events Protection table (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 262. Manual command applied at the Reference Point ring network Figure 259. . . . . . . Figure 263. Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 264. Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 265. Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306 306 307 307 308 309 309 310 311 312 313 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 325 326 326 327 327 328 328 329 329 330 330 331 332 333 334 334 335 336 337 338 339 339 340 341 341 341 343 344 345 346 348 349 350 351
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 266. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 267. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 268. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 269. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN) recovering to idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 270. Double manual ring command (reference pointSSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 271. Double manual ring command (reference pointOSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 272. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointSSSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 273. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointSSRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 274. Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference pointOSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 275. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference pointSSAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 276. Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference pointSSSN) . . . . . Figure 277. Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointOSRN) . . . . . . . . Figure 278. ATM/IP/ETH ports Configuration (examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 279. ATM ports Configuration (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 280. ATM board view (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 281. ATM PSEUDOSUBBOARD view (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 282. ETHERNET board view (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 283. ETHERNET port view (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 284. Software Download general principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 285. Software Administration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 286. Software Package Administration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 287. SDH software package installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 288. ATM software package installation (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 289. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 290. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 291. Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 292. Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 293. Download menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 294. SW Downloading dialogue box example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 295. Software download in progress (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 296. Software Package Information dialogue box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 297. Detail software package (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 298. NE MIB management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLES Table 1. MSP commands and Autoswitch protection priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3. PDH TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. SDH TPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation . . . . . . Table 6. Modifiable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7. Threshold table entities association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8. Maximum Performance Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 366 367 368 368 369 369 371 374 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 380 381 382 383 384 385
167 187 221 221 237 246 288 291
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V

1.1.1 Document scope The aim of this document is to help the operator understand, configure and manipulate Network Elements (NEs) easily, using the Craft Terminal (CT). The different functionalities related to the equipment views, the menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail. 1.1.2 Target audience This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook
The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: Introduction manual
1.2 Terminology
1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. 1.2.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
14 / 386
2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS

In this chapter the organization of the EMLUSM screen, presented after the NE login, is described.
First is introduced the view organization, than the accessible menu options are listed. At the end some further advice are given for Navigation principles.
2.1 EMLUSM view organization

The EMLUSM view (see Figure 1. ) is the first window presented to the operator after the login. It contains the following fields, that provide you with information needed to manage the NE: Severity alarm synthesis, Domain alarm synthesis, Management status control panel View title, View area Message/state area
The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permits to performs all the configuration and supervision and display the specific selected item. The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the description, except for the following information, that differs according the NE type: Domain alarm synthesis The different alarm domain type in which can be subdivided the NE are: Synchronization, External Point, Equipment, Transmission.
Information about the alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Severity alarms synthesis
Domain alarm synthesis

Menu bar
View title
View area
Message/state area Management states control panel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 1. EMLUSM main view organization.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2 Introduction on the EMLUSM menu options

The menu bar allows to perform configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element.
This paragraph list all the menu options and then more details on the relevant contained entries. For each of them the relevant operative function are briefly introduced and it is referred the paragraphs where it is detailed or the introduction to the options of each menu inserted in next paragraphs of this chapter. The flow charts of Figure 2. on page 31, Figure 3. on page 32, Figure 4. on page 33 and Figure 5. on page 34 summarize the menu options. From chapter 3 on details and operative information on the all the views are given. They are not presented according the menu option sequence but according a functional subdivision. In the menu bar there are permanent menu items always displayed. Staring from the left , the menus are:
Permanent Menus Views (first column). See para.2.2.1 on page 19.
To navigate among the views and set TMN and OverHead parameters. Configuration (second column). See para.2.2.2 on page 20.
To set general configuration of the NE, set TMN and OverHead parameters and to show or modify some parameters (performance monitoring, ATM/IP/ETH configuration, MSP, EPS and crossconnection). Diagnosis (third column). See para.2.2.3 on page 21.
To get information about the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory, internal link monitor). Supervision (fourth column). See para.2.2.4 on page 22.
To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling). MS_SPRing (fifth column). See chapter 19 on page 315.
To manage the 2 fiber MS_SPRing protection, setting the relevant configuration. Download (sixth column). See chapter 21 on page 371.
To manage the NE software (download, MIB management). Help To activate the help. (last column).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Further, in the menu bar there are other menus, presented as an alternative, only when a particular object or option is selected.
Other Menus Equipment (eighth column). See chapter 9 on page 97
To manage the NE as a whole, setting subracks and boards which compose it. From the Equipment view the Board view can be accessed. From the Equipment menu is also possible to start the Specific Terminal application for the ATM/IP traffic configuration. Board (eighth column). See chapter 10 on page 111.
To show the physical port available in a specific board. It is the entry point for the Port view. Transmission (seventh column). See chapter 14 on page 173.
It permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources, setting the relevant configuration. Further access the Performance Monitoring and permits navigation to the Board view. It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration. Port (seventh column). See chapter 11 on page 117.
To set and show (detailed alarm view) the transmission resources referred to the Port. It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration. EPS (seventh column). See chapter 12 on page 139.
To manage the EPS protection, setting the relevant configuration. Synchronization (seventh column). See chapter 18 on page 293.
To show and modify synchronization parameters. External Points (seventh column). See chapter 6 on page 55.
To show and modify housekeeping (environmental) alarms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.1 Views menu introduction This menu permits to navigate among the views and set some parameters, by means of the following entries: Backward: Forward: Equipment: Go back to the previous view. Go to the next view. Open the Equipment view. See chapter 9 on page 97. The Equipment menu and theEPS menu are then available on the menu bar. Open the External Point view. See chapter 6 on page 55. The External Point menu is then available on the menu bar. Open the Transmission view. See chapter 14 on page 173. The Transmission menu is then available on the menu bar. Open the Synchronization view. See chapter 18 on page 293. The Synchronization menu is then available on the menu bar. The aim of the refresh feature is to avoid a misalignment between the CT and the managed NE. This misalignment is due to a loss of notifications coming from the NE. Navigate and show the contents of the selected object: the current view change. It is equivalent to a double click on the selected object in the view area. Navigate and show the contents of the selected object. The current view doesnt change but a new window with a new view is opened. Close the EMLUSM view, without stopping the supervision of the NE
External Points:
Transmission:
Synchronization:
Refresh:
Open Object:
Open in Window:
Close:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction This menu permits to set general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by means of the following entries: Alarm Severities: Manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. See para. 4.3.2.1 on page 43. Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the selected object See para. 4.3.2.2 on page 47. Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile referred to the equipment level. See para. 4.3.2.2 on page 47.
Set Alarm severities:
Set SdhNe Alarm severities:
NE Time: Performance:
Display and set the NE local time. See para. 4.2 on page 41. Manage the the Performance Monitoring domain. Used to define the PM parameters, opening the following menu options: Threshold table: See para.17.5 on page. 286. Allows to display as well as search for EPS states. See paragraph 12.5 on page 149. See para.5.2 on page 54. Manage the connection of the paths. See para.15.3 on page 228
EPS overview :
Set ACD level:
Cross Connection Management:
Loopback Management: Enter the loopback management. See para. 14.12 on page 201. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes. Comm/Routing: Enter the Communication and Routing management. See paragraph 8 on page 73. Used to define the parameters for NE and OS in the TMN, opening the following menu options: Local configuration OS Configuration NTP Server Configuration Interfaces Configuration LAPD Configuration Ethernet Configuration OSI Routing Configuration RAP Configuration MESA Configuration IP Configuration IP Static Routing Configuration OSPC Area Configuration IP Address Configuration of pointtopoint interfaces ISA board IP address Tunnelling Configuration OSI Over IP IP Over OSI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Overhead:
Handle the operation on the Overhead bytes. See para.16 on page 259. Used to define the parameters in the following menu options: OH Cross Connection OH Phone Parameter OH TP creation OH TP deleting Allows to display as well as search for MSP states. See paragraph 13.8 on page 168.
MSP overview :
ATM/IP/ ETH Configuration : It allows to create the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections. See paragraph 20.2 on page 366.
2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction This menu permits to get information about the NE, by means of the following entries: Alarms: Display the Alarms Surveillance information of the NE. See para. 7.1 on page 63. It opens the following menu options: NE alarms Object alarms Subtree alarms Equipment alarms Transmission alarms External Points alarms Not operative It opens the following menu options: 15 Minutes 24 Hours Manage the events stored in the NE. See para. 7.4 on page 68 It opens the following menu options: Alarm Log Event Log Software Trace Log
Performance data:
Log Browsing:
View Remote Inventory: Display the remote inventory data, previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the upload remote inventory performed in the Supervisory menu. See para 7.5.2 on page 70. Abnormal Condition list: Display the list of the object class (Loopback, ALS Handler, protection board) and the name of the boards that are in abnormal condition. See para 7.2 on page 65. Internal Link Monitor: Indicates the presence of failure on Rx or Tx side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active/standby MATRIX board. Refer to paragraph 7.3 on page 67.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction This menu permits to set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries: Access State: Manage the supervision access to the NE, with CT or OS. See para.4.1 on page 39. It opens the following menu options: OS Requested Manage the alarms supervision of the NE. It opens the following menu options: Resynchronize. See para. 4.3.5 on page 51. Allow / Inhibits Notifs. See para. 4.3.4 on page 50.
Alarms:
Upload Remote Inventory:Store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. See para. 7.5.1 on page 69. Set Manager list: Restart NE: See para.5.1 on page 53. Reset the NE software. See para.4.4 on page 52.
2.2.5 MSSPRing menu introduction This menu permits to manage the 2 fiber and 4 fiber MSSPRing protection (the last is not operative in current release) , setting the relevant configuration, by means of the following entries: Main dialog for MSSPRing management: Contains all the command to set and manage the MSSPRing See para. 19.4.1 on page 319.
2.2.6 Download menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE software, by means of the following entries: Init download: Units info: Manage the software download, upgrading the NE. See para.21.4 on page 381. Show the status of the software package installed in the NE memory banks. See para.21.5 on page 383.
Mib management: Permits backup of NE software configuration and restore of backupped file. See para. 21.6 on page 385.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.7 Equipment menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE as a whole, setting the boards which compose it, by means of the following entries: Set: Modify: Add or change the board type (a list is proposed). See para. 9.2 on page 101. Change the board type without previously remove it. It is only possible between compatible board or modules (ex. it is possible to change from an Long and Short 1.1 optical module) See para. 9.2 on page 101. Remove the board. See para. 9.2 on page 101. Insert a lock symbol in the board. See para. 9.4.1 on page 105. Delete the lock symbol in the board, enabling changes. See para. 9.4.2 on page 105. Not operative. Show information on the software of the board. See para. 9.5 on page 106. Show the Remote Inventory data inserted in the equipment. See para. 9.6 on page 107. It opens the following menu options: Subrack level Board level Used to define the ISA board IP address. See paragraph 8.13 on page 92. N.B. This option is available only at Subrack view level.
Remove: Set in service: Set out of service Reset: Software description: Remote Inventory:
ISA Board IP Address:
Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper equipment level. See para. 9.7 on page 109. ISA navigate: Start the Specific Craft Terminal application for the ATM/IP traffic management configuration. For details refer to the specific IP or ATM Operators Handbook.
Connect FAN to CONGI#10: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot10. N.B. This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view. Connect FAN to CONGI#12: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot12. N.B. This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.8 Board menu introduction This menu permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol) and to access the port view, by means of the following entries: Port Access: Change Physical Interface Access the Port view. See para. 10.2.1 on page 114. Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and viceversa) on the bimode port( 140Mbi/s/ STM1 switchable). See para. 10.2.2 on page 115.
Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. See para. 10.2.3 on page 116. ATM/IP/ETH Configuration: It allows to create the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections. See paragraph 20.2 on page 366. N.B. This menu is available only if an ATM/IP/ETH board has been equipped in the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.9 Port menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the Port, by means of the entries indicated in the following list. The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA, ATM, IP and ETHERNET). The Port view is reached by means the Equipment menu and Board view to check the detailed alarms presented, but the available menu permits to configure the port (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the Transmission view). In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. It permits navigation to the Transmission view. TP configuration: Set parameters for the Overhead (Signal Label and Path Trace) on Synchronous TPs. See para 14.6 on page 186. Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter. See para 14.8 on page 193. Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDNPRA management. Only for PDH ports views. See para 14.7 on page 191
TP Threshold Configuration:
TP Frame Mode Configuration:
Set Retiming:
AU4 Concatenation: Cross Connection:
Set the retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2Mbit/s. See paragraph 11.4 on page 121. It opens the following options: Enable Disable Only for SDH ports views. See para. 11.5 on page 123. Manage the connection of the paths. See para.15 on page 213. It opens the following menu options: Cross Connection Management Create Cross Connection Modify Cross Connection Set parameters for POM, SUT See para. 14.10 on page 195. Not available for PDH port. It opens the following menu options: Creation / Deletion Configuration Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. See chapter 17 on page 269. It opens the following menu options: Configure Performance Monitoring Display Current Data Display History Data
Monitoring Operation:
Performance:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Loopback:
Enter the loopback management. See para. 14.12 on page 201. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: Port Loopback Configuration Loopback management
MSP
Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. See Chapter 13 on page 155. Only for SDH ports view. It opens the following menu options: MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete
Physical Media:
Manage the physical setting of the TP of the ports. Not applicable to HOA port. See para.11.6 on page 125. It opens a menu which differs according the port type: SDH port: ALS Management Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration LAPD Configuration Ms Configuration PDH port: Line Length Configuration HDSL Configuration NT G703/704 Configuration NT X21 Configuration ETHERNET port: Remote Laser Management ALS Management Ethernet Port Configuration ATM/IP/ETH Configuration Navigate to the upper board level. See para.11.7 on page 136.
Show supporting board:
Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow, opening all TPs See para.11.8 on page 137 Navigate to Monitoring view: permit to show for a selected TP the related POM/SUT/TCM and TCT object if present.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.10 EPS menu introduction This menu permits to manage the EPS protection, setting the relevant configuration, by means of the following entries : Management: Configure: Set EPS protections. See para.12.2 on page 140. Set revertive / not revertive and WTR parameters. See para. 12.3 on page 145. Manage the EPS operator commands (Force, Manual, Lockout) See para.12.4 on page 147.
Switch:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.11 Transmission menu introduction This menu permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources, setting the relevant configuration. Further access the Performance Monitoring and manage Multiplex Section Protections and Loopbacks functions. It permits navigation to the Port view. The menu lists the following entries: Add TP: Search and add TP to the transmission view, than presented in the screen. See para.14.5 on page 179. Display the TPs related to a selected TP. See para.14.14.1 on page 208. It opens the following menu options: Next level of lower TP All lower TP Next level of upper TP All upper TP Remove the TP from the screen of the Transmission view. See para.14.14.2 on page 209. It opens the following menu options: Lower TP Upper TP Selected TP Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path trace. See para.14.6 on page 186. Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDNPRA management. Only for PDH ports views. See para 14.7 on page 191 Set B2 Ex BER and Signal Degrade threshold. See para. 14.8 on page 193.
Expand:
Hide:
TP configuration:
Terminate TP: Disterminate TP: AU4 Concatenation Cross Connection:
Terminate the AU4CTP paths. See para.14.9 on page 194. Disterminate the AU4CTP paths. See para.14.9 on page 194 Only for SDH ports views. See para. 11.5 on page 123. Manage the connection of the paths. See para.15 on page 213. It opens the following menu options: Cross Connection Management Create Cross Connection Modify Cross Connection Port Switch Over Show Cross Connected TPs
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Monitoring Operation:
Set parameters for POM, SUT and Tandem Connection TPs. See para.14.10 on page 195 It opens the following menu options: Creation / deletion Configuration Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. See chapter 17 on page 269. It opens the following menu options: Configure Monitoring Display Current Data Display History Data Define the structure of a selected TP (TU2, TU3, TU12, VC3/VC4, VC12) See para.14.11 on page 200.
Performance:
Structure TPs:
Loopback
Enter the loopback management. See para. 14.12 on page 201. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: It opens the following menu options: Port Loopback Configuration Loopback management Manage the TP physical setting. See para.14.13 on page 206. It opens the following menu options: ALS Management Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration Extra traffic Regeneration Section management Line Length Configuration Set Domain HDSL Configuration NT Configuration X21 Configuration Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. It opens the following menu options: MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete NE MSP synthesis Navigate to the board supporting the selected TP See para.14.14.3 on page 210. Navigate to the port supporting the selected TP See para.14.14.4 on page 211.
Physical Media:
MSP
Show supported board:
Navigate to Port view:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
2.2.12 Synchronization menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the Synchronization parameters and status, setting the relevant configuration, by means of the following entries : Timing Source Configuration: Set timing source priority and quality for the selected input reference. See para.18.2.3 on page 299. Protection Command: T0 Configuration: T4 Configuration: SSU Configuration: Manage commands (force, manual, lockout) for the selected timing reference. See para.18.2.4 on page 302. Enable/disable SSM and WTR on the T0 synchronization source. See para.18.2.5 on page 303. Enable/disable SSM, WTR and Squelch Criteria on the T4 synchronization source. See para.18.2.5 on page 303. Set NE single or with SSU. See para.18.2.6 on page 305.
Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration: Set SSM quality transmitted on the selected T1 SDH timing reference. See para.18.2.11 on page 312. Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDNPRA management. Only for PDH ports views. See para 14.7 on page 191 See para.18.2.7 on page 306. Change the synchronization physical interface from 2MHz (T4) to 2Mbit/s (T5) without traffic and viceversa (see para18.2.8 on page 307. Change the source of a protection unit from 2Mhz (T3) to 2Mbit(T6) and viceversa (see para. 18.2.9 on page 309). See para.18.2.10 on page 311. See para.18.2.10 on page 311. Show the port view related to the selected timing reference. See para.18.2.12 on page 313.
Remove Timing Reference Change T4<>T5:
Change 2MHz>2Mbit Set T0 Equal T4 Remove T0 Equal T4 Show Timing Source:
2.2.13 External Points menu introduction This menu permits to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm), by means of the following entries: Configuration: Display: Set the input/output environmental alarm. See para. 6.2 on page 59. Show the list of the input/output environmental alarm. See para. 6.1 on page 56. It opens the following menu options: Show external Input Points Show external Output Points Show all external Points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

Note: A,B,C,D and E See next figures
Views
Alarm Severities Set Alarm Severities Set SdhNe Alarm Severities NE Time Performance Threshold table
Configuration
Diagnosis
01
Alarms NE alarms A E Local Configuration B OS Configuration
Backward
957.140.602 V
Forward
Equipment
Object alarms
External Points NTP Server Configuration EPS overview
Subtree alarms
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Equipment alarms
Transmission LAPD Configuration Interfaces Configuration Set ACD level
Transmission alarms
Synchronization Ethernet Configuration
Refresh RAP Configuration OSI Routing Configuration
Cross Connection Management Loopback Management Comm/Routing Overhead OH Cross Connection
External Points alarms
Performance data
Open Object IP Static Routing Configuration
MESA Configuration
15 Minutes
Figure 2. Menu options flow chart 1

OSPF Area Configuration IP Configuration
Open in Window
24 Hours
Close IP Address Config. of PointtoPoint interfaces
Log Browsing Oh Phone Parameters Alarm Log
3AL 80755 BA AA
ISA board IP address OSI over IP Tunneling Configuration IP over OSI
386
Event Log OH TP Creation
Software Trace Log OH TP Deleting
MSP overview
View Remote Inventory
ATM/IP/ETH Configuration
Abnormal Condition List Internal Link Monitor
31 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
A G
01

MS_SPRing
Set Main Dialog for MS_SPRing management Modify Remove Units info Set out of service Reset Mib Management Software description Remote Inventory Set in service Init download

Download Equipment
G Port Access

Board
Supervision
957.140.602 V
ATM/IP/ETH Configuration Subrack level
F Change Physical Interface Show supporting equipment
Access State
OS
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Requested
Alarms
Resynchronize
Allow Notifs
Board level
Inhibit Notifs
ISA Board IP Address Show supporting equipment ISA Navigate Connect FAN to CONGI#10 NB.1 Connect FAN to CONGI#12 NB.1
Upload Remote Inventory
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
Set Manager list
Restart NE
Note: A, See previous figures F, See next figure NB.1 available only if CONGI board has been selected in the Subrack level view
32 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
F C
Port
ALS Management Expand Hide TP configuration TP Frame mode configuration TP Threshold Configuration Terminate TP Disterninate TP AU4Concatenation Cross Connection Monitoring Operations Add TP
Transmission
Next Level of Lower TPs
Note: F and C, See previous figures nb1: only for PDH port nb2: only for SDH port TP configuration TP Thresholds configuration Show Optical Configuration TP Frame mode configuration nb1 TX Quality Configuration AU4 nb2 Concatenation Single Fiber Configuration Set Retiming nb1 Regeneration Section manage Extra traffic Enable Line Lenght Configuration
All Lower TPs
01
Disable Cross Connection Set Domain Configure Performance Monitoring Cross Connection Management HDSL Configuration Create Cross Connection Display Current Data Modify Cross Connection NT Configuration Display History Data Monitoring Operations nb2 Creation / Deletion
Next Level of Upper TPs
All Upper TPs
957.140.602 V
with ETHERNET port
Lower TPs
Remote laser Management
Upper TPs
ALS Management
Selected TPs
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Ethernet port Configuration
Cross Connection Management
ATM/IP/ETH Configuration
Create Cross Connections
Modify Cross Connections
with SDH port
Port Switch Over
ALS Management
Show Cross Connected TPs
Show Optical Configuration
Configure Monitoring Configuration

X21 Configuration
Tx Quality Configuration Creation / deletion
Display Current Data Performance Structure TPs MSP Create Loopback MSP Management MSP commands MSP Commands
Single Fiber Configuration Configuration
Display History Data
LAPD config. Performance Loopback MSP Physical Media: Show supporting board
Port Loopback Configuration
TU2 TU3 TU12 MSP Delete Physical Media: NE MSP synthesis MSP Show Supported Boards VC3/VC4 VC12
3AL 80755 BA AA
Loopback management C Navigate to Transmission view Navigate to Monitoring view
386
Ms Configuration
with PDH port Line Lenght Configuration
HDSL Configuration
Port Loopback Configuration F Navigate to Port View
NT G703/G704 Configuration
Loopback management
33 / 386
NT X21 Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
E D B
Note: B, D and E, See previous figures
01

Eps
Timing Source Configuration Display Protection Command T0 Configuration T4 Configuration SSU Config. Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration Frame Mode Configuration Remove Timing Reference Change T4 <> T5 Change 2MHz > 2Mbit Set T0 Equal T4 Remove T0 Equal T4 Show Timing Source Show External Input Points Configuration

Synchronization External Points
957.140.602 V
Management Configure Switch Show External Output Points
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT

Show All External Points
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
34 / 386
2.3 Advices on Navigation principles

Navigation rules are the same for all the NE using the same Craft Terminal Info Model.
This general rules are described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook. In this paragraphs are instead inserted menu options typical for this NE involved in Navigation and example of Navigation. To reach a particular view of the NE there are several ways (navigation is also possible mixing the different ways): double click on the selected object select the object and use the Open object or Open in Window option of the View pull down menu use the Menu option tree structure. The View pull down menu permits to show the following menus: Equipment Transmission Synchronization External Points
The menu structure permits to open the same window following several menu paths. EXAMPLE: to obtain the Create Cross Connection window: First navigation path: Open View Transmission pull down menu Open Transmission Cross Connection Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window Second navigation path: Open View Equipment pull down menu Double click on Board body Select the Board to access the Board view Open Board Port Access pull down menu Open Port Cross Connection Create Cross Connection pull down menu Third navigation path: Open Configuration Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window
The menu structure also permits to pass from a view menu to another (i.e. from port view toboard view or to transmission view) thus facilitating the operators activity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Views Navigation The first level of the Equipment view representation will be displayed directly into the current window, immediately after the NE login. (See Figure 1. on page 16). The Equipment view enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy. Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. The NE hierarchy is generally organized in the following way: subrack > board > port > TP. The navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy is performed by double clicking on the objects: (see also para 9.1, pg. 97) the first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view (see Figure 1. on page 16); by double clicking on a board body , the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. further, by double clicking on a port body contained in the board, the port level of the Equipment view can be reached. The port view displays the inner TPs. it is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the keyboard; It is also possible to: go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option from the views menu go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the view menu. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view ( subrack level, Figure 1. on page 16 ) the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Rack level view is presented. In the Rack Level view two subrack are presented: at the top the 1660SM Subrack, named SR60M at the bottom the Fans Subrack, named SRFAN. The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1660SM Subrack (refer to paragraph 9.2 on page 101 for details)
N.B.
Further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level view is presented.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION
This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access.
3.1 NE management states

The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are the Network Elements (NEs). Operating with the Craft Terminal the NE can present different management states according to the condition of the connection (supervision, local access, connection state, etc). Also general Alarm status are presented. Management states are present at Network Element Synthesis view level and at USMEML view level. All the information referred to the management states are inserted in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook. Any disruption in the communication link between the CT and the NE results in an update of the management states when the CT has detected the communication failure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
3.2 NE supervision and login

The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to get access to the current NE EMLUSM view described in this handbook. The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to work on local or remote NE, selecting it and activating Supervision and Login, as described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook. The EMLUSM Main view is presented as for the following figure.
Figure 6. NE EMLUSM Main view.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION

In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (Craft Terminal access, NE Time, Alarms configuration, etc).
4.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the competition of the OS and the CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available. If the LAC is granted that means the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view the icon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape.
If the LAC is access denied that means the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify NE configuration (it can only read). In the view the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.
If the LAC is requested that means the CT has requested permission from the OS and is waiting for a replay. However the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services includes: Reception and processing of alarms, Performance processing on TPs, Switching back to the OS access state.
The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views: 4.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7. NE management: setting the access state. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the Craft access operation using the Yes or No push buttons. the request is up to the OS which accept or refuse it. If the OS doesnt answer in a predefined time it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be managed from a Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the OS... option from the Access State cascading menu in Figure 7. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the OS access operation. The NE is now managed by the OS. N.B. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view, indicates whether the NE is managed by a Craft Terminal or by the OS. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. When communication is lost with the NE, the OS automatically recovers the communication and put the state that was set before the loss of communication (therefore the Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.2 NE Time management

The NE local time of a selected NE can be visualized and/or realigned on the OS time basis. In this view the OS indication identifies the Craft Terminal. The status of the Network Time Protocol can be checked Select the NE Time... option from the Configuration pull down menu.
Figure 8. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time. The following dialogue box is opened from which you can get and/or set the local NE time and check the NTP Status.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 9. NE Time dialogue box.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The following fields are available: NTP Status section (read only) with the following parameters: NTP protocol It can be enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration option at para 8.5 on page 81) or disabled or empty (greyed). NTP Main and NTP Spare It displays the status of the Main and Spare NTP: reachable or unreachable.
Time section with the following data: NE Time and OS Time It displays (read only) the time of the Network Element and of the OS (Craft Terminal). Set NE Time With OS Time It permits to align the NE time with the time of the Craft Terminal.
Two different operative conditions can be defined:

NTP protocol enabled In this case, NTP Main and NTP Spare will be reachable or unreachable. When both are reachable the NE uses the Main. The Set NE Time With OS Time message is not operative and the user cannot set manually the NE Time. NTP protocol disabled In this case, the NTP Main and NTP Spare are empty (greyed); the Set NE Time With OS Time message is operative and the user can set manually the NE Time (i.e. change the NE time with the Time of the Craft Terminal).
If you do not want to set the NE local time, click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box. To realign the NE time on the OS time basis click in the Set NE Time With OS Time radio button and either click on the Apply push button to validate or on the Close push button to cancel and close the dialogue box. The OS time comes from the PC date configuration which corresponds to the legal GMT time. N.B. When the NTP is not present, the OS system realigns the time of all supervised NEs periodically and automatically with a configured periodicity. This periodicity is common for all the NEs. If you set the NE time, you will force the change, with an immediate effect on the NE. However it will not have any effect on the periodic and automatic mechanism.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.3 Alarm Configuration

The operations described in this chapter, mainly related to alarm setting, are:
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management, Allow/Inhibit alarm notification, Alarm resynchronization.
4.3.1 Procedure to modify an ASAP a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) Select the TP (or the board/port/etc...) whose ASAP is to be changed from the menu click on Configuration > Alarms Severities... (see Figure 11. on page 44 ) select one of the user profiles (#10001 or #10002) and click on Modify (see Figure 12. on page 46) click on the Probable Cause Families associated to the alarm select the relevant alarm in the list of Probable Cause Name in the Service affecting/nonaffecting fields select the needed severity (critical/major/minor...) click on OK (see Figure 11. ) click on Close select the relevant TP and then Configuration > Set Alarms Severities... in the box that appears select the just modified ASAP (eventually check it by means of Detail) click on OK
For further details see paragraphs 4.3.2, 4.3.2.1, 4.3.2.2. 4.3.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) Managed entities yield alarms when they malfunction. This section deals with the configuration of ASAPs. An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which Severities Profiles are assigned, predefined or settable by the operator. Three important notions are: The Probable Cause of the alarm, The Severity of the alarm. The Alarm Type (communication alarm, equipment alarm).
4.3.2.1 Alarm Severities This option permits to configure and display the ASAP. Select the Alarm Severities... option from the Configuration pull down menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 10. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. The ASAP Management dialogue box is displayed.
Figure 11. ASAPs Management dialogue box.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The default presented profiles are:

Profile All Alarms. With this profile all the alarms are enabled (only Sfwr Download Failure is not alarmed). This ASAP enables the emission of all alarms. Profile No Remote Alarmsshows the alarm criterion configuration defined for path alarms (only AIS and RDI and Sfwr Download Failure are not alarmed) This ASAP enables the emission of all: Communication Alarms (i.e. the AIS & RDI alarms are not alarmed) Equipment alarms Environmental Error Processing (i.e. Sfwr Download Failure is not alarmed)
Profile Primary alarms. With this profile the AIS, Battery Degraded, Sfwr Download Failure, SSF and RDI alarms are not alarmed. This ASAP enables the emission of all: Communication Alarms (i.e. the AIS, SSF & RDI alarms are not alarmed) Equipment alarms Environmental Error Processing (i.e. Sfwr Download Failure is not alarmed)
Profile No Alarms : (i.e. all alarms disabled). This ASAP inhibits the emission of any potential alarm. Profile 10001 can be set by the user. Each single alarm can be classified with a criterion selected by the operator. A default standard configuration is set (Battery Degraded, Battery Failure, Communication Subsystem Failure, Path Trace Mismatch are not alarmed). NOTE: if this profile is not already present in the list, it is necessary to create it, by using the dialog of Figure 11. , selecting one existing profile and then clicking on the Clone button.
You can select an ASAP. For ASAP 10001 it is then possible to choose Detail, Modify, Clone or Delete buttons. For ASAP No Alarms , Primary alarms, No Remote Alarms and All Alarms it is only possible to choose Detail, or Clone buttons. Clone selection can be used to create new ASAP. Click on Detail, Modify, or Clone button, the ASAP edition dialogue box is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 12. ASAP Edition dialogue box. The alarm severity assignment profile dialogue box displays a list of probable causes and a list of alarm severity. The Probable Cause Families check buttons allows to filter the probable causes that will appear in the Probable Cause Name list. NOTE: it is necessary to choose one or more of these filters to have the list. To find a particular probable cause, enter its name in the Search entry box at the bottom. ASAPs are already defined in the system with default values for the assigned severities. You can modify the severity associated with each probable cause. To do this, select the probable cause whose severity level you wish to modify. Then click on the option button: Service Affecting (not protected probable cause), and then Non Service Affecting (protected probable cause) and then Service Independent (dont used, it is not operative). For each the severity can be chosen from Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, Nonalarmed or Not used. A Nonalarmed probable cause corresponds to no alarm emitted for this probable cause. When selecting Details the assigned severity are only shown and it isnt possible to modify. When you have finished configuring ASAP, press the OK button to confirm the settings and close the dialogue box or the Cancel push button to cancel the new settings and close the dialogue box. When Clone an ASAP the created one is identified with next number (10002, ....). The max number of ASAP is six. N.B. The number of severities and the number of probable causes is fixed. The ASAP function only enables the modification of the severities assigned to the probable causes, it does not allow the addition, removal or modification of these severities and causes. To take into account a profile modification, it is mandatory to perform a resynchronization of the alarms (see para. 4.3.5 on page. 51). During this resynchronization, the severity of each alarm is updated. Otherwise, the severities are updated only when the modified or new alarms are emitted by the NE.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.3.2.2 Set Alarm Severities To assign an alarm severity to a TP or equipment, select the TP or equipment in the related view and then select the Set Alarm Severities... option from the Configuration pull down menu. The Set ASAP dialog opens.
Figure 13. Set ASAP dialogue box. The List of ASAPs on the left side lists all available ASAPs (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles). If an object was selected in a view before opening this dialog, its ASAP is highlighted in the list. Using the Detail button or doubleclicking on a list item opens the ASAP Edition dialog which displays detailed information on this ASAP.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Within the Apply to section on the right side, the user specifies the objects (TP or equipment) the ASAP selected in the List of ASAPs (new ASAP) should be applied to:
Choose Scope Selected object only The new ASAP is only applied to the object currently selected in the view. This is the default if an object is selected in the view. Network element The new ASAP is applied to all objects of the NE matching the criteria specified in Choose Classes and Choose current ASAP. Since this application process takes some time, its progress is shown in the Section Execution Monitoring. This is the default if no object is selected in the view. Selected object and subordinates The new ASAP is applied to the selected object and those of its subordinates matching the criteria specified in Choose Classes and Choose current ASAP. Since this application process takes some time, its progress is shown in the Section Execution Monitoring. N.B. Due to system architecture, AU4 CTPs are no subordinates of MSTTPs. Therefore, if the AU4 CTP should be included as subordinate, select the related OSTTP (OpS) or ESTTP (ElS) as main object.
Choose Class(es) Enabled if one of the scopes Network element or Selected object and subordinates is selected. All classes Specific class(es) Select one or more object classes the new ASAP shall be applied to.
Choose current ASAP The new ASAP is only applied to objects which are currently assigned to this ASAP. Execution Monitoring Continuously shows the number of modified objects during the ASAP application process if one of the scopes Network element or Selected object and subordinates is chosen.
Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. Press Close to close the dialog and discard any changes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.3.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities Selecting the Set SdhNE Alarms Severities option from the Configuration pull down menu only the alarms at Equipment level (FF, BKF, SHD and ABF) are managed.
Figure 14. Set SdhNE Alarms Severities If an object was selected in a view before opening this dialog, its ASAP is highlighted in the list. Using the Detail button or doubleclicking on a list item opens the ASAP Edition dialog which displays detailed information on this ASAP. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. Press Close to close the dialog and discard any changes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.3.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications The system provides the possibility to allow/inhibit the spontaneous incoming alarm notifications. l) To inhibit alarm notification, Select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Inhibit Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 15. Inhibit alarm notification From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. To inform the operator that alarms have been inhibited, the labels of the alarm panel are greyed out.
N.B.
Inhibiting the alarms notification means that they are not forwarded to the CT but alarms are still generated by the NE.
m ) To allow alarm notification Select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Allow Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16. Allow alarm notifications From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.3.5 Alarms resynchronization The system provides the possibility to recover alarms present on the NE and to update the current problem list of the NE. After this operation CT and NE current alarms are consistent. To resynchronize the alarms, select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Resynchronize option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 17. Alarm resynchronization From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. N.B. This functionality has to be used only if there is any perturbation. Never use this operation during a correct behavior.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
4.4 Restart NE
The restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions. The restart operation in any case activates the Commit (active) version. Select the Restart NE option from the Supervision cascading menu. The following dialogue box is opened.
Figure 18. Restart NE confirmation Click on the OK push button to perform the restart NE. Click on the Cancel push button to abort the restart NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT
In this chapter are inserted setting options referred to the SECurity management:
5.1 Set Manager list

This option is referred to the SECurity management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the NE. Select the Set Manager list option from the Supervision pull down menu. The dialogbox contains the following fields: Manager list: each connected manager to the NE is highlighted in the list. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination. Several manager can be enabled contemporaneously, having in charge the NE. The Manager List contains the list of managers ( i.e. RM, SY, NPOS , EML) that work on the NE. The EMLUSM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i.e. the Manager misses the NE connection). NE Domain field allow to select the domain among that displayed in the list, assigning it to the NE. The different domains could be assigned to different operators.
OK button is used to validate the selection. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 19. Set Manager list

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.2 Set ACD level

This option allows the user to select the level of the Access Control Domain. The ACD manage the concurrence of access among several different managers (i,e. RM and EML). This only acts on the functions that can be used by different manager. Select the Set ACD level option from the Configuration pull down menu. The dialogbox contains the following fields: Current ACD level Show the Access Control Domain level currently set. The Access Control Domain check level Permit to set one of two level checks. By the way, this is an operation that should be performed only during the EMLUSM installation phase: NE level, the ACD is performed on all the NEs No Check, the ACD is not managed The default value is NE level. If it is changed, it is necessary to restart the EMLUSM.
OK button is used to validate the selection. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 20. Set ACD level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
6 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT

This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm),
An external input point is an environmental alarm (also called housekeeping alarm). It corresponds to an external event which is monitored by the NE. Number of relays on the NE are dedicated to check modification of the environment as for example a fire, a flood ... An external output point is used to manage a NE contact (i.e relay) connected to detector. An external output point is independent from external input point. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: Displaying external points, Expanding or reducing external points list, Configuring input and output external points.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
6.1 Displaying external points

Select the External Points option from the Views pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 21. Opening the external points view. After selecting this menu option the external points view is displayed into the current window instead of the current view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 22. External points view. The external points view displays a list of all input and output points. The following information is given for each external point: the external point Type: Input or Output. the User Label: a userfriendly label associated to the configurable external point (see further the paragraph External points configuration). the External State: represents the alarm state. On when the alarm is raised, else Off. If the external point is active (On), a little red flag is represented near the status of the concerned point.
Only for the Output external point there is the following information: the Output criteria: if configurated, display the alarm event and the board affected associated to the Output point (see further the paragraph External points configuration).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
6.1.1 Expanding or reducing external points list. The external points view displays a complete list of the external points but it can also be restricted to the input or to the output points. To see either the input points, the output points or all the external points, select the appropriate option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 23. Expanding or reducing the external points list.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
6.2 External points configuration

The configuration operations available on external points are:
user labels configuration external state. Can be set for output points (ON or OFF) Output criteria associated to the External output point
To configure an external point, click on the concerned row of Figure 22. on page 57 and then select the Configuration option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 24. Configuring external points. The following dialogue box is then opened, displaying information about the selected external point (Input or Output).
Figure 25. External input point configuration dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 26. External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 27. External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Opening the dialog the current state of the selected External Point is shown. [1]
External Input Point Configuration User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the associated event that must be taken under check (for example presences of water or fire in the room where the Equipment is placed) External State: this field is set to off and cant be changed by the operator Probable Cause: this field is set to housekeeping and cant be changed by the operator
[2]
External Output Point Configuration User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the alarm detected or the action that must be executed if a specific event occur (for example a Pump activation when water is present in the room where the equipment is placed) External State: can be set to on (alarm) or off (non alarm) only if Manual option has been selected in the Output Criteria field. Output Criteria can be configured as : Manual (forced). The output contact is set in a fixed way , not depending on a particular event. For example the output contact could be used to Manually activate a pump to drain water from the room where the equipment is placed ; in this case is also necessary to set the option On in the field External State. Flexible. It is possible to define from CT the couple event/CPO#, where the event is chosen between a set of Output Criteria (LOS, RDI and LOF) and specifies the STMN interface which the Output Criteria refers to by clicking on Choose button; subsequently the TP search dialog box will be opened.
When the configuration of the external point is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
62 / 386
7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT
Alarms are always present on the operators workspace. The different types of alarms, their number and their severity level, are represented in all Equipment views (NE views, Board views and Port views). An icon representation is used, which change color when the relevant alarm is active. Thus, at all times, you know the number of alarms and their severity relating to the equipment. Access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition is detailed in the following paragraph. Than is presented the abnormal condition list (as result of operators command such us loop, laser forced on etc.). At the end the Event log access is introduced. Information about the significance of equipment alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section of this handbook.
7.1 Alarms surveillance

In this chapter is described the access to the Alarm Surveillance information of the NE. It is possible to show all the Alarms or filter the alarms report. Select the Diagnosis pull down menu. You can then select the following option from the Alarms pull down menu (see the following figure): NE Alarms: all the NE alarms are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report which is activated Object Alarms: only the alarms of the selected object are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report Subtrees Alarm: only the alarms of the selected object and of the relevant subtrees are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report Equipment Alarms: only the alarms of the equipment management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report Transmission Alarms: only the alarms of the transmission management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report External Points Alarms: only the alarms of the input external point management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report
Figure 28. Alarm Surveillance

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Selecting any of the previously seen options, the Alarm surveillance report is displayed as for the example of the following figure.
This view shows first a synthesis of the NE alarms (Counter Summary) with the sum of all alarms, then a detailed list of alarms of the selected filter (Alarms Sublist).
Figure 29. Alarm Surveillance Detailed information for each alarm is supplied. For example the board in which the alarm is detected, the status of the alarm, the alarm type, the probable cause. The information supplied help the operator, typically during troubleshooting operation, presented in next section of this handbook. (Maintenance section, where more details about alarms are given). Detailed description is given in the AS Operators Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
7.2 Abnormal Condition List

The abnormal condition provides the synthesis of NE not normal conditions listinig the events that contribute to abnormal condition. Select Diagnosis>Abnormal Condition List ( see Figure 30. on page 65). Figure 31. on page 65 is opened.
Figure 30. Abnormal condition menu option
Figure 31. Example of abnormal condition list The abnormal condition are the following:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Loopback ALS is disable and the laser is forced on or off Protection units (in case of EPS, SNCP and MSP ) are in lockout or in forced status Board (or subboard) is placed in a not configured slot 01 SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 65 / 386
ED
957.140.602 V
Select an abnormal condition and click on OK to open the relative dialog window. Figure 32. on page 66 is opened.
Figure 32. Example of loopback dialog window management The other abnormal condition types will open the corrisponding management window or will open the window to navigate towards the management window.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
7.3 Internal Link Monitor

This function improves, at the user interface level, the diagnostic associated to the hardware failure. The presence of a failure on RX or TX side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active MATRIX is detected; Internal Link Monitor displays a detailed localization of the link failure: a graphical representation of all NGI link status, for the active and standby MATRIX is shown. Select the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu. As shown in Figure 33. on page 67 the first page displays the link status for the main MATRIX, the second one concern the spare MATRIX. In detail, each page contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: the tab of the page displays the user label of the MATRIX board; the left side of the page displays the block representing the MATRIX board; the right side of the page displays the list of blocks representing the equipped boards; each block displays a string contained the user label of the associated board; two arrows are displayed between the MATRIX block and each board block; the two arrows represent the link status in Rx and Tx side: a red arrow indicates a link failure a green arrow indicates a working link the Refresh button allows to perform an explicit refresh of all the displayed information.
In order to indicate all the possible roots of the link failure, all boards that detect the link failure are represented by a red block in the page of the MATRIX main: a port board is represented by a red block if a link problem is detected in the NGI Rx from the active MATRIX; the MATRIX is represented by a red block if a link problem is detected in one of the NGI Tx from one of the possible port board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 33. Internal Link Monitor
ED
01
957.140.602 V
7.4 Log Browsing

From the Network Element context views, perform the following operations to have access to the Event Log file: In the Diagnosis pulldown menu, select the Log Browsing option. The following options are proposed:
Figure 34. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view The proposed option: Select the Alarm Log option (Log Id # 1 ) to access the Event Log file. The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open, permitting to analyze all alarms stored in the NE. Refer to the ELM Operators Handbook Select the Event Log option (Log Id # 2 ) to access the Event Log file. The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open, permitting to analyze all events stored in the NE. Refer to the ELM Operators Handbook Software Trace Log option is reserved to Alcatel personnel only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
7.5 Remote Inventory

This paragraph describes the access to the remote inventory of this NE. In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification, construction data ect. The options used are: Upload Remote Inventory: store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. View Remote Inventory: display the remote inventory data, previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the upload remote inventory performed in the Supervision menu.
Remote Inventory option of the Equipment menu is instead presented in para. 9.6 on page 107. 7.5.1 Upload remote Inventory This command stores the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. Select the Upload Remote Inventory option of the Supervision pull down menu. The following confirmation dialog box is opened.
Figure 35. Remote Inventory confirmation request Clicking on OK after a while an information dialog box is presented.
Figure 36. Remote Inventory completed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
7.5.2 View Remote Inventory This command displays the remote inventory previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the Upload remote inventory. Select the View Remote Inventory option of the Diagnosis pull down menu. The Remote inventory data appears as for the following figure.
Figure 37. View Remote Inventory Data is displayed in specific fields: Company It indicates the Companys (Alcatels branch) which designs the unit. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviations meaning (four characters). Unit Type It indicates the units acronym Unit Part Number It indicates Alcatel or Factory products Part No.. The number indicated is that printed on the labels or on the units front coverplate. Software Part Number It indicates the id. of the units resident software

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
CLEI Code It indicates the CLEI code according to Bellecore specs. TRISD325 Manufacturing plant It indicates the Companys manufacturing plant id. within the company, producing the unit. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviations meaning (four characters). Serial Number It indicates the products serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm. Date identifier It indicates the meaning of the date that follow. It is a twodigit code supplying the following information: 00 01 02 03 04 date of construction at the time of final testing production order data construction date of the unit lot date product has been forwarded to customer customer order date
Date (YYMMDD) The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. When only the year is displayed, the format must be YY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
72 / 386
8 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT 8.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain
The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to define configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network. 8.1.1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc A brief description of basic concepts and terms involved in the communication and routing domain follows. During the TMN design process, a network is partitioned into domains; each domain can consist of a collection of two types of nodes: nodes supporting a link state routing protocol ISIS; these nodes will be called adaptive routers; ISIS protocol floods the network with link state information in order to build a complete consistent picture of the network topology. Use of ISIS routing protocol in a TMN facilitates installation and operation due to the self learning capabilities of these protocols and automatic network reconfiguration in case of failure; moreover the use of these standardized routing protocols guarantees interoperability in a multivendor environment. nodes not supporting these protocols; these nodes will be called static routers;
Networks partitions consisting of the former type of node will be called adaptive routing domains; networks partitions consisting of the later type of node will be called static routing domains. Moreover, a node which have to take routing decisions must became Intermediate Systems, all others can be made End Systems For the description of the following paragraphs use is made of Figure 38. on page 74. It is not a network planning example, it is only used to describe L1 ,L2, RAP and MESA. 8.1.1.1 Partitioning into Routing Subdomains In order to reduce the overhead associated with distributed adaptive routing, it may be useful to divide a adaptive routing domain into smaller routing subdomains, called areas or level 1 subdomain. A level 1 subdomain should fulfill the following requirements: a level 1 subdomain should form a connected subnetwork; this subnetwork should have only a few links to the outside world, compared with the number of internal links; each node must belong to exactly one level 1 subdomain; each node which is connected to a foreign level 1 subdomain must become a level 2 intermediate system; level 1 intermediate systems know how to communicate only with IS in the same area; obviously, there must be at least one level 2 intermediate system per level 1 subdomain; Level 2 intermediate systems must form a connected network, because level 1 paths cannot be utilized for level 2 communication. This network will be called level 2 backbone.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the most simple case, all nodes within a level 1 subdomain share the same area address. In general it is allowed to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 subdomain even if the usage of this features should be checked with Alcatel engineers. The synonymous list is used to ease partitioning in the future. There is a basic rule, which must be followed by two neighboring level 1 intermediate systems within a subdomain: there must be at least one area address in common between their two synonymous list, otherwise they are not able to communicate with each other.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.1.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains In certain situations it may be necessary to partition a given network into separate routing domains, where no routing information is exchanged between these domains. The major benefits of this partitioning are reduction of memory, processing and traffic overhead, because there is no exchange of routing information between the domains. Communication between separate routing domains must be achieved through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP). A Reachable Address Prefixes represents static routing information. It can only be associated with a link of a level 2 intermediate system, whereby this link crosses routing domain boundaries. A Reachable Address Prefixes is handled in the same way as information about a foreign level 1 subdomain within the own domain. The Reachable Address Prefixes indicates that any packet whose destination network address NSAP matches the prefix may be forwarded via the link with witch the prefix is associated. For example, consider network which is split into two separate routing domains: routing domain A resides in a level 1 subdomain with area address a routing domain B resides in a level 1 subdomain with area address b In order to enable the communication, the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain A must contain the area address b and the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain B must contain the area address a. On the other hand, within a given level 1 subdomain, there can be some NEs not supporting ISIS nor ESIS protocol (static routing). In such condition, the communication can be achieved through the use of Manual End System Adjacencies (MESA). A prerequisite for the use of manual end system adjacencies is that the area addresses of the connected nodes must be the same; as a consequence the nodes must belong to the same level 1 subdomain. Within a pure Alcatel network there is no need to use any kind of static routing. Therefore normally RAP and MESA shall never be used. AREA (subdomain) 1
L1
L1 L1 L1 L1
L1 L1 L1 L2
L1 L1 L1 L2 L1 L1
L1
L1 with MESA

L2 L2 L2 L1 L1 L1 L2
AREA (subdomain) 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
01
= NE
with RAP
= NE not supporting ISIS

L1
L1 with MESA
AREA (subdomain) 3
Figure 38. Routing subdomain organization example
957.140.602 V
8.1.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP This feature is applicable to NEs with ATM/IP board. It permits to manageATM/IP traffic encapsulating SNMP messages of the TCP/IP protocols over the OSI stack using CLNP/LAPD/ECC protocols. 8.1.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 This feature allows the Element Manager to reach the GNEs (and all the relevant NEs behind them) by using IP networking. This would permit to use an external DCN based on IP only. Hence, no OSI networking would be required on the external DCN. OSI over IP technique is used to meet the target. OSI packets leaving the SH are encapsulated into IP packets within the SH system itself. Hence, packets leaving the SH are IP packets, containing the original OSI packet. Once the packet get the NE through a pure IP network, the GNE has to strip off the IP encapsulation, extracting the OSI packet, and to route the OSI packet as it does today using a pure OSI networking. Hence, the internal networking of the SDH network (DCCs) is still based on OSI. No IP packets shall flow inside DCCs, because the GNE receives the IP packet containing the OSI packet, deletes the IP header, and forwards only the OSI packet on DCCs. The default OSI lower layers networking can be replaced by IP routing capability at the bottom of the QB3/QECC communication protocol suite; the choice is software switchable at NE level. The implementation adopts the RFC1006 standard to put the OSI upper layers on top of IP networking. The application goal is to offer the TCP/IP transport (i.e. Internet compatibility) in alternative to the full ISO/OSI communication protocols, in the complete DCN network or at least in a consistent portion of it. Figure 39. depicts the protocol architecture.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 39. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.2 Communication and routing views

To access select Comm/Routing option from the Configuration pull down menu as shown in the following figure. The Communication and Routing Views allows to perform the following operations: Local Configuration: OS Configuration: definition of the local NE addresses addressing of the main and spare OSs connected to the local NE
NTP Server Configuration:addressing of the main and spare NTP servers connected to the local NE Interfaces Configuration subdivided in: LAPD Configuration: definition of the LAPD port parameters for each LAPD channel on the local NE definition of configuration parameters needed to manage a local NE which provides a LAN ethernet interface
Ethernet Configuration:
OSI Routing Configuration subdivided in: RAP Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of NE connected by Reachable Address Prefixes in a domain different from the one of the local NE. These information are stored in RAP table. configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of non ISIS NE in the same domain as the one of local NE. These information are stored in MESA table.
MESA Configuration:
IP Configuration subdivided in: IP Static Routing Configuration: definition of Host/Network destination address for IP static routing definition of Open Shortest Path First address
OSPF area Configuration:
IP Address Config. of PointtoPoint interfaces: definition of the Equipment Controller IP address ISA board IP address: definition of the ISA board IP address
Tunneling Configuration subdivided in: OSI over IP: IP over OSI: definition of destination IP address for OSI over IP tunneling. definition of destination NSAP address and type of IP routing for IP over OSI tunneling
All the previously cited operation can be entered choosing the relevant option of the menu, as shown in the Figure 40. The options are described in next paragraphs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 40. Comm/Routing options
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
77 / 386
8.3 Local Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the Local Configuration option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 41. ) and allows to configure the local address of the NE. The following fields are present: a Local Address section contains the following graphical object: a Presentation Selector (P.Sel) identifies a presentation entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not be modified. a Section Selector (S. Selector) identifies a section entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not be modified. a Transport Selector (T. Sel) identifies a transport entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not be modified. a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. The first field of the NSAP address, AFI, determines the NSAP format. The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 exadecimal digits) and, depending on the its value, the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: the value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40 characters). the value of AFI 39 identifies the ISODCC format of 40 characters long. the value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIPV2 format of 40 characters long. In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address, level 2, inserted in the NE (check the value in the para. 8.7 on page 85 ) or it might be selected by the operator. Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is 1d). In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting because of the variable format: a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field a second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address Synonymous Area Addresses section allows to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 subdomain. The compilation of the two network addresses is optional and if they are inserted, the last two fields, System Id and Network Selector, of the mandatory address and of the synonymous addresses must be the same. System Type section determines whether the local NE acts as a intermediate system level 1 or as a intermediate system level 2 or as a End System. Note that a level 2 intermediate system performs functions of a level 1 too. End System is not operative.
Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 41. Local Configuration
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
79 / 386
8.4 OS Configuration
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the OS Configuration option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 42. ) and allows to configure the addresses of the Main and Spare OSs connected to the local NE. The following fields are present: Main OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialogbox. Spare OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialogbox.
Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 42. OS Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.5 NTP Server Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the NTP Server Configuration option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 43. ) and allows to configure the addresses of the Main and Spare NTP (Network Protocol synchronization Time) Servers connected to the local NE, used for time distribution in the network. The following fields are present: Enabling NTP Protocol section allows to enable or disable the NTP Protocol. Main NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialogbox. Spare NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialogbox.
If the NTP server is coincident with the OS (same hardware), the same NSAP address of the OS must be assigned. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 43. NTP Server Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.6 LAPD Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>Interfaces Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the LAPD Configuration option. The LAPD Configuration dialog opens (see Figure 44. on page 83, this example has one LAPD Interface configured). It contains the following functional block and graphical objects: a section named LAPD Interfaces List that allows the user: to display the list of configured LAPD Interfaces using a graphical table; to change the role of the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List; to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List; to create a new LAPD Interface.
This section contains the following graphical objects: the number of LAPD interface displayed in the LAPD Interface List; the LAPD Interface List that lists all the configured LAPD Interfaces; for each LAPD Interfaces, the table displays: the user label of the TTP containing the configured LAPD Interface (MS/RS TTP); the LAPD role that contains one of the following value: User Network Delete button that allows to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD table; Change Role button that allows to change the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface selected in the table (after selection the Figure 46. on page 84 is shown to confirm action required); Create button that allows to create a new LAPD Interface; this button starts a new dialog (see Figure 45. on page 84) named Create LAPD Interface; it is disabled when the maximum number of LAPD Interface has been configured. This Create LAPD Interface dialog contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: a Choose button that allows the operator to select the superior TTP of the LAPD Interface to be created; this button starts the TP Search dialog; the TP Search dialog will be configured in order to display in the right tree only the allowed TTP of the LAPD Interface; a section LAPD Role that allows to configure the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface to be created. This connection is a must to establish connection between two NEs: if one is configured with User role, the other one connected must be configured with Network role.
a section named Search Criteria that allows the user to display only the LAPDs of the selected type in the LAPD Table; the section contains the following graphical objects: the field Interface Type that allows to select the type of the LAPDs to be displayed in the LAPD Table; the field will manage both ADM and WDM DCC type; the value Ignore will allow to display all the LAPD types; the Search button starts the search of the selected LAPD type; this buttons can be used to refresh the LAPD table too.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The LAPD Interface List will be updated on reception of the Delete/Create/Change DCC CTP notification. If no LAPD Interface are configured in the equipment, the message No LAPD Interface will be displayed near LAPD Interface counter (that it is at zero).
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Figure 44. LAPD Configuration dialog
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
83 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 45. Creation LAPD Interface Figure 46. Confirmation to change LAPD Role
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
84 / 386
8.7 Ethernet Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing > Interfaces Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the Ethernet Configuration option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 47. ) and allows to define the parameters needed to manage a NE which provide a LAN ethernet interface . The following fields and data are present: Ethernet Interface field allows to define or remove a Local Area Network Port for the access to the Data Communication Network. MAC Address section allows to display the address of the Network Element in the Ethernet LAN; it is a readonly field. OSI Section: L2 only Parameter field indicates if the port shall be used for level 2 traffic only, thus avoiding transmitting L1 packets. Note that the flag shall be set to No if some other nodes (NEs or OSs) of the same area of the relevant NE are connected to the Ethernet. One example is indicated in Figure 48. on page 86. L1 Default Metric is a not modifiable field , Priority field can be set ( default value for ethernet is 64) L2 Default Metric is a not modifiable field , Priority field can be set ( default value for ethernet is 64)
IP Section section allows to define the node IP Address, IP Mask and the Routing IP Protocol used; If OSPF or Both options of Routing IP Protocol field are selected, also the Associated OSPF Area must be set.
Apply button performs a configuration change of the data. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
LAN L2 NE No AREA 2 Figure 47. Ethernet Configuration NE No L2 OS AREA 1 NE Yes L2
01
957.140.602 V AREA 3
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 48. Ethernet Configuration L2 only parameter
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
86 / 386
8.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing > OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the RAP Configuration option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 49. ) and allows to configure the Reachable Address Prefix table. Each element of the RAP table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a separate domain; the separate domain is selected by the address Prefixes. If the addressed element is the OS, the LAN port will be used. The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device (upper part of the figure); each page represents a particular element of the RAP table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter. In detail, each page contains the following data: Physical Interface button if the element is empty, displays the none value and allows to select a LAPD ports or a LAN port which will be used to reach the addressed area. if the element isnt empty, displays the selected port and allows to change it. Area Address Prefix section allows the user to address the separate domain. The Area Address Prefix represents a NSAP address without the fields System Id and Network Selector. MAC Address section allows to address the element of a domain to be reached the Ethernet LAN; the field is managed as a simple strings of 12 digit. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 49. RAP Configuration
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing > OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the MESA Configuration option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 50. ) and allows to configure the Manual ES Adjacencies table. Each element of the MESA table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a End System element; the ES element must be in the same area as the one of the local NE. If the addressed element is the OS, the LAN port will be used. The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device (upper part of the figure); each page represents a particular element of the MESA table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter. In detail, each page contains the following data: Physical Interface button if the element is empty, displays the none value and allows to select a LAPD ports or a LAN port which will be used to reach the End System element. if the element isnt empty, displays the selected port and allows to change it. System Id section represents the System Id of the ES element. MAC Address section allows to address the element in the Ethernet LAN; the field is managed as a simple strings of 12 digit. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete MESA table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 50. MESA Configuration
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.10 IP Static Routing Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP Static Routing Configuration option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 51. ) and allows to configure the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration. The following fields and data are present: [1] [2] Destination Host IP Address: allows to define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host Destination Network: it is alternative to Destination Host IP Address; allows to define the IP Address and IP Mask to reach a network.
[3] [4]
Default Gateway IP Address: allows to define the address of the next hop gateway CLNP (Connection Less Network Protocol): allows to use a predefine IP over OSI tunnel towards a gateway. IP PointtoPoint Interface Id: allows to use point to point interfaces made available by EC Points from [3] to [5] are alternative
[5] N.B.
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 51. IP Static Routing Configuration
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.11 OSPF Area Table Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the OSPF Area Table Configuration option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 52. ) and allows to configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration. The following fields and data are present: OSPF Area IP Address OSPF Area Range Mask
Both fields gives a synthetical information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a Network) in an Area. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 52. OSPF Area Table Configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.12 IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 53. ) and allows to set the Equipment Controller IP Address used to communicate with the ISA board. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 53. IP Address Configuration of PointtoPoint Interfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.13 ISA board IP Address

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the ISA Board IP Address option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 54. ) and allows to set the IP Address of the ISA Board that communicate with the Equipment Controller (EC). Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogbox and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 54. ISA Board IP Address
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.14 OSI over IP

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the OSI over IP option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 55. ) and allows to configure the Remote Destination IP Address of the Equipment Controller.
Figure 55. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
8.15 IP over OSI

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing>Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP over OSI option. The dialogbox opens (Figure 56. ) and allows to configure the Destination NSAP Address and the IP Routing Type. The following fields are present: Destination NSAP Address: a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. The first field of the NSAP address, AFI, determines the NSAP format. The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 exadecimal digits) and, depending on the its value, the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: the value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40 characters). the value of AFI 39 identifies the ISODCC format of 40 characters long. the value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIPV2 format of 40 characters long. In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address, level 2, inserted in the NE (check the value in the para. 8.7 on page 85 ) or it might be selected by the operator. Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is 1d). In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting because of the variable format: a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field a second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address IP Routing:allows to choose the type of IP routing supported as follows; OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) RIP (Routing Information Protocol) Both None If OSPF or Both options are selected, also the Associated OSPF Area must be set. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 56. IP over OSI Tunneling configuration
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
95 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
96 / 386
9 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT 9.1 Introduction and navigation

This section deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. Using the menu options, select the Equipment option from the View pull down menu The first level of the Equipment Overview representation will be displayed directly into the current window (see the following figure). The Equipment Overview enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy. Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. The NE hierarchy is organized in the following way: subrack > board > port > TP The navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy is performed by double clicking on the objects: the first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view (see Figure 57. ); further, by double clicking on a board body, the board level of the Equipment view can be reached (as described in chapter 10 on page 111). further, by double clicking on a port body contained in the board, the port level of the Equipment view can be reached (as described in chapter 11 on page 117). The port view displays the inner TPs. it is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the keyboard; It is also possible to: go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option from the views menu go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the view menu. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view ( Subrack level, Figure 57. ) the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Rack level view of Figure 58. is presented. In the Rack level view, two subrack are presented: at the top the 1660SM Subrack, named SR60M at the bottom the Fans Subrack, named SRFAN. The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1660SM Subrack (refer to paragraph 9.2 on page 101 for details)
N.B.
Further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level view of Figure 60. is presented.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 57. Equipment Overview Subrack level
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 58. Equipment Overview Rack level (without Fans subrack)
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
98 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V Figure 59. Equipment Overview Rack level (with Fans subrack)
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 60. Equipment Overview Equipment level
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
99 / 386
In the Subrack view it is possible use the options offered by the Equipment menu (see following figure) clicking on it in the menu bar.
Alarms indications are present at every NE level. Details about these alarms indications are given in the Maintenance section. All the options offered by equipment menu are described in the next paragraphs. Set and change the boards present on the Equipment is the main function. Board administrative state that decide on the in/out of service of the board is also described.
Figure 61. Equipment menu. Equipment setting operation are defined according the following sequences: configuration of a new board Configure the board using the option Set change of board type Set out of service the board Configure the board using the option Set remove a board Set out of service the board Remove the board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
9.2 Set and change or remove board/subrack

The boards can be set, changed or removed using the menu options of the Equipment view.
a)
Setting or changing a board/subrack
A new board/subrack may be created in either an empty slot or it may replace an existing Out of Service board/subrack (without the lock symbol). In fact, the Set option is available only after selecting an empty slot or an Outofservice board. Click on the empty slot in which a board/subrack has to be added, or on an existing Out of Service board in order to change it (see next para. 9.4 on page 105 for in /out of service info). The contour becomes highlighted to show that operations can be done on it. Select the the Set option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 61. on page 100. The following example of dialogue box containing a list of the different types of boards/subrack is displayed.
ACCESS CARD LIST
PORT LIST
SUBRACK LIST Figure 62. The list of different boards/subrack relative to an NE slot (examples)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
N.B.
Choose the board/subrack type required, by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. The name of the board is highlighted. Click on the OK push button to validate the choice. The board/subrack representation appears on the NE view in the slot when the board change is effective. A lock representation appears over the boards (inservice, see next para. 9.4 on page 105) In the Create/Modify dialogue box, the Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box. The Help push button opens a Help view giving information about the context. Removing a board/subrack Click on the board/subrack to remove (Out of Service board/subrack, as for next para. 9.4 on page 105). The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot. If the slot you are working on is already empty no name appears under the slot. Select the Remove option the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 61. on page 100. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the Remove operation. N.B. It is possible to remove a board only if it is not involved in any type of cross connection (OH bytes included) or Performance monitoring.
b)
c)
Modify a board N.B. This procedure can be done to replace an existing optical module with another of different type without previously remove it.
Click on the optical module to replace. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted to show that operation can be done on it. Select the Modify option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 61. on page 100 . A dialog box containing a list of different types of optical module is displayed. Chose the optical module type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list; the name of the module is highlighted. Click on OK push button to validate the choice. The board representation appears on the N.E. view in the slot when the board change is effective. A padlock representation appears over the board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The list of boards/subrack displayed during a Set operation is restricted to those which the equipment may accept in the selected slot. Therefore the list will vary depending on which slot has been selected. For details on the board/subrack identified by acronyms and NE physical composition please refers to the Technical Handbook.
9.3 Connect Fan to CONGI board

This command enable the Fan Subrack alarms management from CONGI in slot 10 or slot 12 according to the option selected in the Equipment menu. Figure 63. shows an example Select the CONGI board To enable this function select the Connect Fan to CONGI#10 option ( or as alternative Connect Fan to CONGI#12) of the Equipment menu if the supervision Fan Subrack cable is connected to CONGI unit inserted in slot 10.
Figure 63. Connect FAN to CONGI It is possible to disable this function by selecting the relevant CONGI board and than choosing the Remove Fan connection from CONGI#10 option of the Equipment menu (refer to Figure 64. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 64. Remove FAN connection from CONGI
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
104 / 386
9.4 Board administrative state

The operator decides to set a board in service or out of service, if it is allowed by the NE.
N.B.
In the equipment view, a lock representation appears over the boards which are in in service state.
9.4.1 Setting a board in service In the Subrack NE view, click on the board in order to select it. Select the Set in service option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 61. on page 100. A lock representation appears over the boards.
9.4.2 Setting a board out of service In the Subrack NE view, click on the board in order to select it. Select the Set out of service option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 61. on page 100. Select the Ok push button in the confirmation window which appears. A lock representation disappears, substituted by the symbol 9.4.3 Consulting a Boards Administrative state The boards administrative (in service or out of service) state is indicated on the board view as shown in the following figure. over the boards..
Administrative State Information
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 65. Consulting a boards administrative state.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
9.5 Software description

This function allows the operator to visualize information about the software(s) which is (are) present in the selected board. Click on a board in which the software is wanted to know (EQUICO or MATRIX unit). The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot. Select the Software description option of the Equipment pull down menu of Figure 61. on page 100.
The following window opens.
Figure 66. Software Description dialogue box. The dialogue box contains as many folder sheets as there are softwares in the selected board. Click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
9.6 REMOTE INVENTORY

This command displays the remote inventory data present in the Subrack and Boards. Select the Remote Inventory option of the Equipment pull down menu. Two options are available (see the following figure): Subrack level: prints or write on a file the remote inventory data of the subrack. Board level: show the remote inventory data of the selected board
For the Board level a dialog similar to Figure 67. appear.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 67. Remote Inventory (example)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The remote inventory data of the Subrack level can be printed on the default printer ( Figure 68. ) or to a file in postscript or ASCII format ( Figure 69. ).
Figure 68. Select Printer N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
Figure 69. Select Output Format for file
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
9.7 Show supporting equipment

Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Equipment menu to navigate to the equipment that supports the selected board. Figure 70. (example) opens.
Figure 70. Equipment Overview Subrack level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
110 / 386
10 BOARD VIEW 10.1 Introduction

The Board View permits to show the physical port available in a specific board and to access the Port view. The Board view is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu, then double clicking on the selected board to show the relevant Board view, presenting the ports. In case of board with multi access SDH another view permits to select the SDH port (see example of Figure 71. ) An example of board view with the presented port is in Figure 72. Alarms and Status indications referred to the board level are present at the bottom of the view, as indicated in the example (Administrative State and Board Alarms/Status). This information are In/Out of service of the board (Administrative State) and board alarms and status like missing (RUM) or mismatch (RUTM), EPS condition if supported and other indications typical of each unit . In the Maintenance section details on this indication are given.
Administrative state
Board Alarms/Status
Figure 71. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 72. Example of a Board View A port type is described with a board rectangular view and a port identification. The port identification is usually internal to the rectangular board (see Figure 73. one example of optical port).
Figure 73. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis The following information is available: type of port (name) state of port (alarm status synthesis) symbol of the port
The operator is provided with a representation of the port alarm synthesis on each port. The messages displayed at the top view provide port denomination. The messages displayed at the bottom provide information about Board alarms. A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type or the alarms name. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
By double clicking on a board view, it is also possible open the corresponding port view (see chapter 11 on page 117).
ED
01
957.140.602 V
10.2 Board View Menu

Selecting the Board option in the menu bar of Figure 72. on page 112 the complete pull down Board menu is presented (Figure 74. ): Port Access: Access the Port view. See para.10.2.1 on page 114 . Note: this option is accessible after the selection of a port contained in the view. Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and viceversa) on the bimode port( 140Mbit/s / STM1 switchable). See para. 10.2.2 on page 115.
Change Physical Interface:
Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. See para.10.2.3 on page 116. ATM/IP/ETH Configuration: It allows to configure the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections. Note: this is available only if an ATM/IP/ETH board has been equipped in the Subrack.
Figure 74. Board menu options These options are described in next paragraphs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
10.2.1 Port Access Click on Port Access menu option of the Board menu to access the Port View ( see chapter 11 on page 117). Navigation to the Port view permits to show a detailed alarm presentation of the port and to set the relevant configurations as for the example of the following figure.
Figure 75. After Port Access selection (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
10.2.2 Change Physical Interface This command allows to change the type of physical interface in a bimode port (140 Mbit/s / 155 Mbit/s switchable port) i.e it changes the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI. Select the Symbol of the port in the Board view. Click on Change Physical Interface menu option of the Board menu (see Figure 76. on page 115)
Figure 76. Change Physical Interface The following dialog box is opened:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on the OK push button to change the physical interface. Click on the Cancel push button to abort the change of the physical interface.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
10.2.3 Show Supporting equipment Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Board menu to navigate to the subrack that supports the selected port view. Figure 77. (example) opens.
Figure 77. Subrack level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11 PORT VIEW 11.1 Introduction

This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification and configuration of each port. The Port View permits to set and show the transmission resources (i.e. the Termination Point, TP) referred to the specific Port; it permits to check the detailed alarms presented by each TP of the Port, and the available menu permits to configure the port, (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the Transmission view). In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA, ATM/IP/ETH). The Port View can be accessed from the Equipment or Transmission Views. The Port view is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu then double clicking on the presented rack/subrack to present the subrack view, as described in chapter 9 on page 97. Double clicking on the selected board the relevant Board view is available presenting the ports (see chapter 10 on page 111). By double clicking on a board view, the corresponding port view is opened (see Figure 78. ). The Port view is also reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. Then the Add TP option of the Transmission menu permits to select and confirm a TP (see the description at para. 14.5 on page 179). On the transmission view which appears select the TP and on the Transmission menu select the Navigate to a port view option. The HOA port view can only be reached from the Transmission view, selecting a VC or TU TP. The ATM/IP/ETH TPs are not automatically created when the board is inserted in the subrack but must be created as explained in Chapter 20 on page 365. From the Port view It is possible to Navigate to Transmission view. The port types contain the following TP: SDH port: Electrical or Optical SPI TTP, RS TTP, prot TTP (MSP TTP), AU4 CTP, Trail Monitor (only with enabled POM) PDH port: PPI TTP, En CTP, VCn TTP HOA port: VC4 TTP, TUG3, TUG2, TU3, TU12, Trail Monitoring (only with enabled POM) ATM port: VC4C TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP and E1 TTP IP port: VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP ETHERNET port: MAU, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 78. Example of a Port View On the port view, the messages displayed at the top view in the form of message boxes provide more information concerning the type and the alarms of the port. On the other hand the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about MSP protection and ALS state ( if they are supported ). A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.2 Port View: elements on the TP

The symbols of the TPs (see Figure 79. ) have the following meaning:
Alarm Icon Area The icon boxes represent alarms. The color of the boxes changes according to the alarm severity. TP Role The icon boxes represent the function: Adaptation, Termination or Compound Adaptation and Termination. Cross-connected state If the condition of the resource is cross-connected, an icon with a x appears beneath the box. Performance state If the condition of the resource is under performance monitoring, an icon with a P appears beneath the box. Loop state If the condition of the resource is under loop, an icon with a L appears beneath the box. Selected state An orange frame around the box identifies the TP selection, so port menu refers to the selected TP. Alarm icon area
G.783 TP Role (Termination) TP identifier
Crossconnected state
Selection indication TP under Performance monitoring
Figure 79. Termination TP box. Figure 80. is another example of TP with different G.783 function role. Alarm icon area
G.783 TP Role (Adaptation)
G.783 Functional block acronym

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 80. G.783 Adaptation TP box.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.3 Port View Menu

Selecting the Port option in the menu bar of Figure 75. on page 114 the complete pull down Port menu is presented (Figure 81. ) The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA and ATM), and is introduced in the following: TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path Trace overhead on Synchronous TPs. See para 14.6 on page 186. Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter See para. 14.8 on page 193.
Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or ISDNPRA management See para 14.7 on page 191.
Set Retiming: AU4 Concatenation: Cross Connection: Monitoring Operations: Performance: Loopback: MSP
Enable/disable the retiming feature on the outgoing 2 Mbit/s signal. See paragraph 11.4 on page 11.4. Only for SDH ports views. See para 11.5 on page 123 Manage the connection of the paths. See para.15 on page 213 Set parameters for POM/SUT and TC (Tandem Connection) TPs. Not available for PDH port. See para.14.10 on page 195 See and Show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. See Chapter 17 on page 269. Manage the loopback commands, for commissioning or maintenance purposes. See para. 14.12 on page 201.
Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. See Chapter 13 on page 155. Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the port. Not applicable to HOA port. It is described in the following paragraph. Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level It is described in this chapter, see para.11.7 on page 136 Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow, opening all TPs. It is described in this chapter, see para.11.8 on page 137 Navigate to Monitor view: permit to show an overview about the monitoring operation (POM, SUT, TC) all TPs. It is described on paragraph 11.9 on page 138.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SDH Port
PDH port
ATM Port
Figure 81. Examples of port menu options (SDH, PDH and ATM port)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.4 Set Retiming

The Retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2 Mbit/s and its purpose is to absorb the jitter /wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occur. The feature is set individually per port Select a 2Mbit/s port and zoom in to open the port view. When the Retiming feature is disable, the color of the state information at the bottom of the window is brown and the label Retiming State Disable is written. Select the Set Retiming>Enable option from the Port menu (see Figure 82. )
Figure 82. Set Retiming enable (before) As result of this operation the state information color become green and the label Retiming State Enable is written (see Figure 83. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 83. Set Retiming enable (after)
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
122 / 386
11.5 AU4 Concatenation

Select a STM16 or STM4 optical interface to configure as AU4 concatenation structure.
Zoom in to open the board and then the port view menu. Select the AU4 Concatenation option from the Port menu to open Figure 84. on page 123 (in this example a STM16 view is shown) The STM16 stream appears divided into different groups: not all AU4s can be chosen as first AU4 but only AU4#1, AU4#5, AU4#9, AU4#13 for AU4c. Therefore for concatenated action of four AU4s in one AU4c these AU4 streams are deleted and substituted by the new AU4c component. Select the supported concatenation Number =4 (selection 64 is not operative) to visualize the available group/groups then select the group to concatenate and click on the Concatenate push button. Click on the Cancel key to exit and come back to the previous window.
Figure 84. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands The Concatenate button will be enabled and the Deconcatenate button will be disabled when is selected a non concatenated AU4, viceversa when is selected a concatenated AU4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 85. Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view The port view represented in Figure 85. shows an STM16 interface with four AU4 concatenated in one AU4c. The AU4c appears as a single icon that has the same size of the actual AU4 blocks. The AU4c streams support the Alarm synthesis, CrossConnection states and Performance Monitoring information as standard AU4 streams. To deconcatenate an AU4c select again the AU4 Concatenation option in the Port View menu and then select the AU4c to deconcatenate (see Figure 86. ). Click on the Deconcatenate push button to apply the command or on Cancel to exit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 86. Example of a concatenated AU4c
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.6 Physical Media option menu

The Port > Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP of the port.
The Physical Media options are also accessible from the Transmission menu. It opens a menu which differs according the port type: SDH port: ALS Management Show Optical Configuration Tx Quality Configuration: see para. 18.2.11 on page 312 Single Fiber Configuration LAPD Configuration: see para.8.6 on page 82. Ms Configuration
PDH port: Line Length Configuration. HDSL Configuration. Not operative NT G703/704 Configuration. Not operative NT X21 Configuration. Not operative
ETHERNET port: Remote Laser Management. Not operative ALS Management. Not operative Ethernet Port Configuration. ATM/IP/ETH Configuration. Refer to Chapter 20 on page 365.
These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.
Figure 87. Physical media menu (SDH port example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.6.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration The aim of this paragraph is to describe the optical port hence the laser sources. Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) is useful in case of a loss of communication between two NEs due to optical fiber breakdown. For safety reasons it may be necessary to shutdown the laser to enable the fixing of the communication link. The automatic laser shutdown function can only be configured from the optical ports of the equipment. Select the SPI block in the port view and then select the Port pull down menu. Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the ALS Management option . The Automatic Laser Shutdown State dialogue box opens ( Figure 88. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 88. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The dialogue box enables the ALS Management and the Restart parameters. The following actions are available:
a)
Allow Automatic Laser Shutdown. To allow the automatic laser shutdown functionality, select the ALS Enabled option of the ALS Function: option button.
b)
Forcing the Laser to start or stop. When the laser is forced to ON or OFF, it is restarted or stopped and the Automatic Laser Shutdown is disabled, if it was not already so. 1) Force laser ON. To carry out a laser forced ON, select the Laser Forced ON option of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or Close push button to close the dialogue. Force laser OFF. To carry out a laser forced OFF, select the Laser Forced OFF option of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or Close push button to close the dialogue
2)
c)
Delete : this option deactivates the ALS function, returning to the state shown in Figure 89. on page 127. From this window it is only possible to create the ALS function (all the ALS commands are greyed).
Figure 89. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) d) Enabling or Disabling Automatic / Manual Laser Restart. To enable (disable) an automatic laser restart following an automatic laser shutdown (periodic restart), select the Enabled (Disabled) option of the ALS Auto Restart. The laser will be ON for 2 secs and OFF for 70 secs, in periodic mode. The same procedure is applicable for the ALS Manual restart : while the ALS auto Restart is disabled,the manual restart permits to perform a laser restart for a single time period.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
e)
Wait to restart time The Wait To Restart Time: field indicating the delay period in seconds, occurring before an automatic laser restart is launched (following an automatic shutdown). The restart time period for this equipment is fixed to 70 secs.
f)
ALS Manual restart When the ALS Manual Restart is Enable it is possible to enter two different commands: Manual or Test Restart. The Manual command immediately activates a single laser restart: this command overrides the wait to restart time. The Test restart is similar to the manual restart but the laser remains ON for a longer time in order to make a measurement of the received optical power.
When all the different parameters have been configured, select the Apply button to confirm the setting and close the dialogue box. Selecting only the Close button allows you to cancel the choices made.
Note that the ALS procedure is activated ( if enable ) only when the fiber has been interrupted and the ALS state has not to be confused with the laser state. ALS states (see example of Figure 90. ), displayed by the functional state message area of the optical port, are: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF. In test = The laser restart has been automatically activated . Active = The ALS has been activated (On). Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created). Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created). Off = Laser off (when ALS is created). Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command. Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 90. ALS and Laser current state (example)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.6.2 Show Optical Configuration This command permits to get detailed information on the optical characteristics of the port that is visualized. Firstly select an optical board and the SPI block, then click on Show Optical Configuration option from the Physical media pull down menu to visualize the parameters of the selected optical port. Figure 91. shows an example of the parameters of the selected interface. N.B. This dialogue box can only be read. You cannot write in the entry boxes.
Figure 91. Visualizing a port optical parameters The laser ports are identified by three major characteristics: STM Level: describes the input/output optical interface types: STM1/STM4/STM16 The wavelength of the laser source: the units are nanometers (nm = 109 m). The use of the port: describes whether the laser port is used for intraoffice transmissions on long distances (Long Haul ] 40 km) or for infraoffice transmissions on short distances (Short Haul ] 15 km).
The Colored Interface Parameters section is not applicable in the current release To close the dialogue box click on the Cancel push button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.6.3 Single Fiber Configuration The single fiber configuration can be realized with passive optical couplers (see Figure 92. ) The optical coupler must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx . For this purpose and in general to avoid a low Tx/Rx decoupling also when the optical line is interrupted, an identification label has been assigned to the local Tx side ; the Rx part in the remote receive side checks the congruency between the received and the expected labels. If a signal label mismatch is recognized on the received section, an alarm (AIS and RDI) will be generated. Example of Figure 92. shows that is accepted the label 1 from Tx1 to Rx2 while is accepted label 2 from Tx2 to Rx1.
Tx1 Label : 1 Tx1
Tx2 Label : 2 Tx2
Single bidir OPTICAL PASSIVE COUPLER Rx1 Rx1: accepted label=2 OPTICAL PASSIVE COUPLER Rx2 Rx2: accepted label=1
Figure 92. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Select the Physical media Configuration option .

option and then from the cascading menu the SDH Single Fiber
Figure 93. opens. The following fields have to be considered: Allow Single Fiber: select the transmit mode on the single fiber (enable or disable). Transmitted Section: Transmitted Media Byte assigned label to Tx (014). Transmitted Media Type overhead byte used for the communication: Media Dependent byte of Regeneration Section or S1 byte of Multiplex Section (the part not used for the SSM)
Received Section: Received label Expected label (014).
Figure 93. Single Fiber Configuration View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.6.4 Ms Configuration The Ms Configuration menu allows the SS bit provisioning for Multiplex Section Object (MSTTP) in SONET/SDH network interworking. Select the MSP TP. Click on Ms Configuration menu option of the Port menu. Figure 94. opens. This dialog allows to select between SDH or SONET networks. After the selection click on Apply and then on Close to close the dialog. Ms Forced AIS is not supported in the current release.
Figure 94. Ms Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.6.5 Line Length Configuration To manage the Line Length configuration click on Line Length Configuration menu option of the Physical Media menu. Figure 95. opens. This dialog allows to configure the line length for a PDH PPI TP of a 45 Mbit/s port. The OK button validate the configuration and close the dialog box. The Cancel button removes the dialog
Figure 95. PDH Line Length Configuration View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.6.6 Ethernet Port Configuration To set the Ethernet port parameters, select the Ethernet Port Configuration option of the Port > Physical Media menu as shown in Figure 96.
Figure 96. Ethernet Port Configuration options Subsequently Figure 97. on page 135 will be opened.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 97. Ethernet Port Configuration menu For the Ethernet port it is possible to choose between two Configuration Type: [1] Auto Negotiation : enable allows to configure the Rate to be negotiated (10 or 100 Mb/s). The Directionality (Full Duplex) and the Flow Control (Activated) are always enable and cant be changed. It is possible to Restart the Auto Negotiation by depressing the relevant button. Manual: allows to force the Rate at 10 or 100 Mb/s . The Directionality is always Full Duplex.
[2]
In both cases in the Port view is possible to check the the Auto negotiation Current State, the Interface Type and the current Bit Rate (refer to Figure 96. on page 134).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.7 Show Supporting Board

Select a TP. Click on Show Supporting Board menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the board that supports the selected port view. Figure 98. (example) opens.
Figure 98. Board View Example.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.8 Navigate to Transmission View

Select a TP.
Click on Navigate to Transmission View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Transmission View that is related to the selected TP. Navigation to the Transmission view permits to show a complete overview about the signal flow as for the example of the following figure..
Figure 99. After Navigate to Transmission view selection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
11.9 Navigate to Monitoring View

Select a TP where are configurated some Monitoring Operations (POM, SUT, TC). Click on Navigate to Monitoring View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Monitoring View that is related to the selected TP. Navigation to the Monitoring view permits to show a complete overview about the Monitoring Operations (POM, SUT, TC) as for the example of the following figure. In Figure 100. on page 138 is shown an example of Monitoring View of a TP with POM and TCM both before and after matrix.
Figure 100. View of Monitoring Operations (example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
12 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION MANAGEMENT 12.1 Introduction

It is unthinkable to launch a telecommunications system, handling millions of communications, without the possibility of replacing equipment in a real time way, consequent to equipment failure. Everything must be done so that the communications can continue smoothly and so that the equipment failure remains transparent to the users. Protection management deals with this aspect of the EMLUSM. The protection is performed by switching the board supporting the protected service when this board fails to a protecting board capable of supporting the same service. This protection is realized according to a protection scheme. An equipment protection scheme is composed of the following parameters which can be configured: Group type: 1+1 or 1+n the group type specifies if one or more unreliable resources for protection can be assigned to one or more reliables resources. 1+1 group type means that a working element is protected by one protecting unit. 1+n group type means that n working elements are protected by only one protecting unit. Protection priority: A priority can be assigned to protected units in 1+n protection schemes. This priority can be be 1, 2, ... or n, 1 being the highest priority. Configuration type: revertive or non revertive In revertive mode, a protected service will be switched back to its protected element when it has recovered from its failure. In non revertive mode, the switch to the protecting element is maintained even after a recovery from failure. Protection wait to restore time: Used when revertive mode is active, the protection wait to restore time prevents several protection switches due to an intermittent failure. A protected element must be fault free during this fixed period of time before a protected service is switched back to it.
Board duplication remains the easiest way to ensure equipment protection in a system. The actions that can be undertaken are of the following type: Consult and modify an Equipment Protection Scheme (EPS), Force Switch EPS,
In Board view, the board whose contents is represented is considered as implicitly selected. EPS protection states are displayed by the functional state message area of the boards involved in an equipment protection scheme.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
12.2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS

In order to consult EPS, perform the following operations: The Port view is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu to present the subrack view, as described at chapter 9.1 on page 97. Select the Equipment option in the View pull down menu. Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Management... option as show in the following figure.
Figure 101. Consulting EPS The following dialogue box is opened.
r01sr1/board#40 r01sr1/board#23 r01sr1/board#32 r01sr1/board#27
Figure 102. EPS Management dialogue box The EPS Management dialogue box shows the current NE protection schemes in the left side. The list gives for each protecting board the protected board(s). The available protection schemes are coherent with the NE type and release. The right side of the dialogue box allows to modify the EPS configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The current release of this NE fix the following protection:

N+1 (with N 6)P63E1 or P63E1N protection board of slot MAIN (protected): P63E1 or P63E1N, slots 242730333639 board of slot SPARE (protecting): P63E1 or P63E1N, slot 32
N+1 (with N 15) P3E3/T3 protection board of slot MAIN (protected): P3E3/T3, from slot 25 to 39 board of slot SPARE (protecting): P3E3/T3, from slot 24 to 38
N+1 (with N 15) P4ES1N protection board of slot MAIN (protected): P4ES1N, from slot 25 to 39 board of slot SPARE (protecting): P4ES1N, from slot 24 to 38 For P3E3/T3 and P4ES1N more than one protection group N+1 revertive can be created, depending on the equipment configuration. The spare board position can be assigned in a flexible way .The only constraint are the following: the access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT card the HPROT card has to be plugged at the left side of the access card group the main/spare boards have to be adjacent. the protecting board has to be plugged at the left side of the protected group of boards the protecting/protected group of ports have to be of the same type
N.B.
1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure. This does not apply to the local STM1 interface so the traffic on it is lost. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way; no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX are present. 1+1 ATM MATRIX 8x8 protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way; no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX are present. 1+1 MATRIX protection board of slot 23, MATRIX main (protected) board of slot 40, MATRIX spare (protecting) for each type of failure on the MATRIX main board ( CRU, Shelf Controller) a switch is performed to the spare boards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The MATRIX protection is automatically presented in the left side of the dialog box when the SPARE MATRIX is created in the Set option of the Equipment menu. It is not created with the EPS menu described in this chapter. This right side is divided into two parts. The upper part provides a message field with the name of the Protecting board and a choose button to display the list of boards available. The lower part provides a list to display the Protected boards currently in the displayed scheme. A choose button is provided to display the list of boards which could be added as protected. A delete button enables user to remove a protected board from a scheme. a) Scheme displaying
To display a specific scheme, user selects an item on the left list. This operation fills the protecting element text field and the protected list with the board user name. If user clicks where there is no item displayed, the right part is displayed empty. The Cancel push button closes the dialog box. b) Scheme creation
To create a new protection scheme,dont click on item in the left list. In this way the right part is displayed empty and the Choose Protecting button is sensitive. Press this button to displays a window to choose a board in the Board Selection list (see Figure 103. on page 143). The board are listed opening the NE>rack>subrack levels. After that operation, Choose Protecting button becomes insensitive and Choose Protected becomes sensitive (see Figure 104. on page 143) The user can add, always using the same Board Selection list dialogue box presented, as many protected boards as wanted (max.15 in this NE, N+1). When the right part of window is correctly filled, the OK button close the dialog box and create the scheme (the new list is update reopening the EPS Management dialogue box). The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box. c) Scheme deletion
To delete an existing protection scheme, the user selects a scheme in the left list. Using the Delete button, user could delete the scheme. d) Scheme modification
To modify an existing protection scheme by adding or removing protection units, the user selects a scheme in the left list. Using Choose button for protected elements, user could add protected boards. By selecting a protected board and using the Delete Protected button, user could remove protected elements from scheme. When the right part of window is correctly filled, the OK button close the dialog box and modify the scheme. The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 103. EPS: board selection
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 104. EPS: choose protected
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
143 / 386
The EPS functional state of a board selected in the board view is displayed at the bottom of the view as shown in the following figures.
Protection role
Protection status
Switch Type
Figure 105. EPS functional state from protected active board view
Figure 106. EPS functional state from protecting active board view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
12.3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS

This functionality configure Revertive and Wait Time to Restore in a protection scheme.
In order to configure, perform the following operations: Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Configure option as show in the following figure.
Figure 107. Configure EPS The following dialogue box is opened.
Figure 108. EPS Management dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The dialog box provides configuration for elements such as : the name of the protecting element as a label the Equipment Type (board) of the protecting element as a label a list displaying the protected elements owned by the scheme the Revertive Mode flag as an option menu. The available values are revertive and non revertive the wait time to restore time value (steps of 30 seconds, from 60 to 600). Only for N+1 EPS. Notes: in the current release the Wait Time to Restore is fixed to 5 minutes.
For this NE: 1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 is Not Revertive only 1+1 ATM MATRIX 8x8 is Not Revertive only 1+1 MATRIX is Not Revertive only N+1 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1N) protection is Revertive N+1 3x34/45 Mbit/s (P3E3/T3) protection is Revertive N+1 4x STM1 ELECTRICAL port (P4ES1N) protection is Revertive
When the configuration of the equipment protection scheme is completed confirm closing the dialog box by clicking on the OK push button. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialog box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
12.4 Switching EPS

This functionality enables to force a protecting board to work even if there is not failure.
The forced switch will fail if the other board is already forced switched or if the protecting board has a failure condition. In order to switch an EPS, perform the following operations: Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Switch option as show in the following figure.
Figure 109. Switching EPS
The following dialogue box is opened.
Figure 110. EPS Switch dialogue box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
This dialogue box displays in its left part the EPS of the selected board. From this dialogue box the operator can configure, in the current release, only the Lockout options, by clicking on the relevant radio button. The Manual to command perform the manual switch, active only if the other board is not alarmed. Clicking on the OK push button will initiate the switch and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
12.5 EPS Overview

EPS Overview allows to display as well as search for EPS states.
Selecting the EPS Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure 111. opens
Figure 111. EPS overview To Search the EPS groups two different ways of filtering are supported; a filtering for all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units carrying a specific Status. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: Board Type: allows to filter for the EPS protected boards; the following filters values should be offered (examples): Ignore MATRIX MATRIXN P3E3/T3 P63E1 P63E1N P4ES1N ATM4X4 01 SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 149 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
957.140.602 V
Status: allows to filter for all possible EPS protection states;the following filters values should be offered (examples):
Ignore Normal DNR AutoFail AutoWTR Manual Force Lockout
After the filter selection click on Search button to start; the field below the Search button will be updated (see Figure 112. )
Figure 112. EPS overview after Search (Example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Each protection unit is presented with the following information:

Protection Group (example protection GroupId, 40) Board Id (example r01sr1/board#40 ) Board Role: Ped Ping (Protected) (Protecting)
B Status (board status): A S F (Active) (StandBy) (Faulty)
Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow Normal DNR AutoFail AutoWTR Manual Force Lockout
(Do Not Revert) (Autoswitch Equipment Fail) (Autoswitch Wait Time to Restore) (Manual switch) (Force switch)
The colors used for each row have the following meaning: Green (OK): Red (Critical): for protected protection units active for protected protection units in fail condition, protection unit in lockout or active on autoswitch or commands for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for autoswitch or commands for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State)
Orange (Major):
Cyan (Indicative):
At the bottom of the EPS Overview windows are available five button that allows to navigate through the EPS management views and subrack view, board view. In this way the operator has a quick link towards the views showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states. N.B. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The buttons available are: Open Subrack View: opens the Subrack view showing the protection states with icons on the boards (see Figure 113. ) The possible protection states and the relevant symbols are explained in the following: Symbol EPS protection status No Request Do not Revert Lockout
Auto Switch (WTR, Fail) Manual Forced
Open Board View:
opens the board view showing the alarm and the board administrative states (see Figure 114. ) opens the EPS Switch dialog box. See 12.4 on page 147 and the relevant description. opens the EPS Management dialog box. See Figure 102. on page 140 the relevant description. opens the EPS Configuration dialog box. See 12.3 on page 145 and the relevant description.
Open Commands:
EPS Management: and EPS Parameters:
Click on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V Figure 113. Subrack view after Open Subrack View command
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 114. Board view after Open Board View command
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
153 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
154 / 386
13 MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION MANAGEMENT 13.1 Architecture types

The Multiplex Section Protection is the connection between two NEs protected by a cable and port duplication. At the source the signal is duplicated and sent to the sink via two independent cables. When occurs a multiplex section failure, the system switches to the other cable and port. The MS Linear Trail Protection can be applied to any NE where it is possible to configure a linear APS (single ended/dual ended) line protection. For this NE is applicable the APS 1+1 Proprietary, the APS 1+1 Standard and the APS 1 :1 Standard dual ended. The APS 1 +1 (not revertive) feature permits a 1+1 protection in a linear link, where a path signal is protected by another dedicated path carrying the same signal. The protection can be set both in single (unidirectional) and in dual (bidirectional) ended mode. In single ended mode (unidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching only the signal affected by the failure. In dual ended mode (bidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching both the affected and the unaffected signals. Architecture 1+1 or N+1 Standard Described in ITUT Rec. G783/G841. The refence switching criteria are SF and SD. It provides a k1/k2 communication protocol thus this protection can be single or dual ended. Architecture 1+1 Proprietary (not used ) The refence switching criteria are SF and SD. No k1/k2 communication protocol is provided thus this protection can be only single ended. Architecture 1+1 Optimized (not used ) Architecture 1 : 1 Standard (not used ) Described in ITUT Rec. G783/G841 as architecture 1 : n ( with n=1 ). The refence switching criteria are SF and SD. It provides revertive mode managed by k1/k2 protocol and thus this protection can be single or dual ended. The spare interface can be used to transport low priority traffic . The WTR time is used with revertive mode. Signal Degrade (SD) software setting enables the MSP protection mechanisms when a SD is recognized on the working port. The SD threshold reference value depend on the NE selected threshold on the MS termination point. This threshold value is configured as explained in the para.14.8 on page 193.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
13.2 MSP Options Introduction

All the MSP options are available starting from the Port View following the step explained below: Select Equipment from the Views menu Double click on the SDH optical board to configure to open the port icon Double click on the port icon to open the port view Select the MSP block in the port view and then choose the MSP options by clicking on Port > MSP menu; the possible choice are: MSP Create see para 13.3 on page 157. MSP Management see para 13.4 on page 161. MSP Commands see para 13.7 on page 166. MSP Delete see para 13.5 on page 163.
MSP Create, MSP Management, MSP Commands and MSP Delete can also be accessed from the Transmission > MSP menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
13.3 MSP Create

Select the MSP Create option from the Port > MSP menu ( see Figure 115. on page 157) to open the MSP Schema Creation (see Figure 116. on page 157).
Figure 115. MSP Create Option
Figure 116. MSP Schema Creation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
In this release two MSP Protection Schemas are supported: MSP 1+1 standard MSP N:1 standard
Select one and then click on Add Port button in the Ports field to create a MSP schema. Figure 117. on page 158 is opened. Following steps are necessary: choose Port select a Port Role (protected or protecting) define Channel Id (mandatory for MSP N:1) define SDH Priority (type of traffic, High or Low)
Figure 117. MSP schema creation Port dialog Select the Choose Port button to define the Protected Port and Protecting Port units. Figure 118. on page 159 is opened.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 118. TP Search Click on RackSubrack and select the Board ( Protected / Protecting ) on the Equipment window (left side). The termination Points list (right side) is available. On this right side select the OpS TP of the chosen board and then click on the OK button. It is possible to select the board through the Board History button selecting the board list menu. The Filter Section is divided into different fields. It permits to visualize a reduced TP Class. If used, OpS class must be selected. The complete TP research description is reported in the Transmission View chapter 14.5.1.2 on page 182. Click on the OK button and repeat the operation for both Protected Port and Protecting Port. If it has been selected a Protected/Protecting port configured in a previously MSP schema protection an error message of access denied will be appear on the screen. In the dialogue of Figure 116. on page 157 also configure the MSP protection schema with the chosen Protection Schema and enter the related Schema Parameters according the following rules:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1+1 Standard can be dualended or singleended, Not Revertive. N+1 Standard can be only dualended Revertive.
At the end click on the OK button to confirm the MSP protection schema configuration. An error message will be appear if the selected schema is not supported by the NE.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 119. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example)
Figure 120. MSP N:1 standard protection schema (example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
13.4 MSP Management

Select the MSP Management option from the Port > MSP menu ( see Figure 121. on page 161 ) to open the MSP Schema Configuration (see Figure 122. on page 162).
Figure 121. MSP Management Option The MSP Schema Configuration dialog shows the current state of the MSP schema, settings and state (protected or protecting) of the current SDH-n port. This dialog allows to set the configuration parameters for the designated multiplex section: Protection Schema reported in the previous paragraph 13.1 on page 155. Schema Parameters: Dual Ended / Single Ended protection switch and directionality. Revertive/Non Revertive mode. The WTR Time (Wait To Restore) is the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure / defect. Enable Switch on SD is not operative in current release.
Ports area display the current MSP schema: Port Id: identify the location of the board Role: identify the role of the board (Protecting or Protected) Channel Id: mandatory for MSP N:1 (max. value is 14) Priority: type of traffic, High or Low
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Configure the MSP protection Schema with the chosen protection schema and enter the related schema parameters. At the end click on the OK button to configure the MSP protection schema. An error message will be appear if the selected schema is not supported by the NE.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 122. MSP Management View
13.4.1 MSP modification The same MSP Management option can be used to modify the schema parameters of an active MSP configuration. Before changing a single ended (unidirectional) schema into a dual ended (bidirectional), all active switches must be cleared (manual switch, lockout,... ). If the operator wants to change the protection schema architecture or the ports involved in the MSP schema, the current schema must be removed and recreated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
13.5 MSP Delete

Select the MSP Delete option from the Port > MSP menu (see Figure 123. on page 163) to open the MSP Schema Deletion (see Figure 124. on page 163).
Figure 123. MSP Delete option
Figure 124. MSP Schema Deletion Click on OK button to delete the selected MSP Schema Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
13.6 Display of Protection State

The MSP protection state of a port is displayed at the bottom of the Port view. Some examples are reported in Figure 125. The following states are always displayed: Port Status Active (red color) or Standby (orange color). The active protection status is referred to a protected/protecting port ( where the traffic is transported): when a failure is detected, the protecting port is ready to save the traffic (and becomes active). The standby protection status is referred to a protecting/protected port that is ready to save the traffic. MSP Protection Role Protected (green color) or Protecting (ochre color). The protection role depends on the selected port type (Protected / Protecting). MSP Group Status, MSP Own Unit and MSP Related Unit (green color) Displayed if an automatic switch is requested. Own Unit stands for the currently displayed unit in the port view, Related Unit stands for the related unit of the same protection group . The status indications are: NR: (abbreviation of No Request); normal, idle condition, the traffic is on the main port DNR:(abbreviation of Do Not Revert); the SF or SD have been recovered but the traffic is switched on the spare port PF: a protection failure has been detected on the port RF: a release command has been failed FOP: a failure of protocol has been detected complete: = the bridge/switch actions are completed pending: = the bridge/switch actions are pending The complete and pending indications precede the following statuses: AS: automatic protection switching enabled MS: a manual local protection command has been activated FS: a forced local protection command has been activated LO: a lockout local protection command has been activated SF/SD: Signal Failure or Signal Degraded has been detected WTR: wait time to restore status MSP Request Source (green color) indicates where the operator commands (force/manual/lockout) have been performed. Only present when a command is operative. Local: switch due to near end SD/SF or local user switch command Remote: switch due to received K1/K2 bytes. A remote switch cannot be released locally, but can be overwritten by a switch with higher priority. MSP Protocol Status This parameter indicates the current APS Protocol status. The following values are possible: OK Failure (in case of FOP)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
MSP statuses displayed in a normal conditions
MSP statuses displayed after an automatic protection switching
MSP statuses displayed after a forced command
Figure 125. MSP Protection Status Examples Figure 125. represents a MSP configuration with a normal condition, with an automatic protection switching and with a forced command. In any situation are represented the statuses displayed on both protected/protecting Port views. The Active status indication, with a forced command on the protecting group, shows where the forced command is applied.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
13.7 MSP Commands

Select the MSP Commands option from the Port > MSP menu ( see Figure 126. on page 166 ) to open the MSP Commands window (see Figure 127. on page 167).
Figure 126. MSP Commands option Protecting Port : the location of the board hosting the protecting port is displayed. Protected Port : the location of the board hosting the protected port is displayed. The Lockout of protection command denies working channel access to the protection section by issuing a Lockout of protection request (on the Protection Status of MSP Management). It is possible to Lockout the Protecting Port or Lockout the Protected Port; to remove the lockout commands select Release Ping (for the protecting) and Release Ped (for the protected). The Force to command switches the working channel (Protected port) to the protection section (Protecting port), unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exits on the protection section, by issuing a Forced switch request for that port (on the Protection Status of MSP Management). It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the Force to Protected port command. For 1+1 nonrevertive system, forced switch no working channel transfers the working channel back from protection to working section, unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. Since forced switch has higher priority than SF or SD on working section, this command will be carried out regardless of the working section condition. The Manual to command switches the working channel (Protected port) to the protection section (Protecting port), unless a failure condition exits on the protection section or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a Manual switch request for that port (on the Protection Status of MSP Management). It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the Manual to Protected port command. For 1+1 nonrevertive system, manual switch no working channel transfers the working channel back from protection to working section, unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. Since manual switch has lower priority than SF or SD on working section, this command will be carried out only if the working section is not in SF or SD condition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The Clear WTR command cancel the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure/defect. The Exercise command issues an exercise request for protection channel and checks responses on MSP bytes, unless the protection channel is in use. This check controls the k1/k2 communication protocol functionality to be sure that the protocol is right also on the protection section. Not Operative in current release. The Release command clears all previously switching commands.
Figure 127. MSP Commands The priority levels for the MSP commands are (from the higher to the lower one): Lockout, Force to, Autoswitch (SF&SD), Manual to. Table 1. on page 167 gives the priority rules when are occurred two different commands. The first column on the left and the first row at the top report the switch protection and the external MSP commands. The row/column crossing gives the command or protection result (i.e.: if an Autoswitch and a Manual to command are present, Autoswitch is operative. Table 1. MSP commands and Autoswitch protection priority Lockout of protection Lockout of protection Forced to Forced to Autoswitch Manual to
Lockout
Lockout
Lockout
Lockout
Forced
Forced
Autoswitch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Lockout
Forced
Autoswitch
Manual to
Lockout
Forced
Autoswitch
ED
01
957.140.602 V
13.8 MSP overview

MSP Overview allows to display as well as search for MSP states. Selecting the MSP Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure 128. opens
Figure 128. MSP overview To Search the MSP groups two different ways of filtering are supported; a filtering for all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units carrying a specific Status. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: Board Type: allows to filter for the MSP protected boards; the following filters values should be offered (examples): Ignore P4ES1N P4S1N P4E4N P4S4N P16S1N S41N L41N L42N S161 S161N 01 SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 168 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
957.140.602 V
S161ND L161 L161N L161ND L162 L162N L162ND MATRIX MATRIXN
Status: allows to filter for all possible EPS protection states;the following filters values should be offered (examples): Ignore NR (Normal) DNR AutoSF AutoSD AutoWTR Manual Force Lockout APS Invalid (Fail) Bad channel (Fail)
After the filter selection click on Search button to start; the field below the Search button will be updated (see Figure 112. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 129. MSP overview after Search (Example)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Each protection unit is presented with the following information: Protection Group (example protection GroupId, 137) Port Id (example r01sr1sl33/port#02OpS ) Role: Ped Ping Protected Protecting
Status (board status): A S F ET (Active) (StandBy) (Faulty) Extra Traffic (Not operative)
Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow NR DNR AutoSF AutoSD AutoWTR Manual Force Lockout APS Invalid Bad channel (Normal) (Do Not Revert) (AutoSwitch Signal Fail) (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) (AutoSwitch Wait Time To Restore) (Manual Switch)
(Protection fail condition APS invalid) (Protection fail condition Channel Mismatch)
The colors used for each row have the following meaning: Green (OK): Red (Critical): for protected protection units active for protected protection units in fail condition, protection unit in lockout or active on autoswitch or commands for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for autoswitch or commands for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State)
Orange (Major):
Cyan (Indicative:
At the bottom of the MSP Overview windows are available five button that allows to navigate through the MSP management views and to open the Port View. By clicking on Open Port View the operator has a quick link towards the view showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states. N.B. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The buttons available are: Open Port view: opens the port view showing the correlation between the alarm and the MSP protection states. See Figure 130. on page 171. opens the MSP Create dialog box. See Figure 116. on page 157 and the relevant description. opens the MSP Delete dialog box. See Figure 124. on page 163 and the relevant description.
MSP Create:
MSP Delete:
MSP Management: opens the MSP Management dialog box. See Figure 122. on page 162 and the relevant description. MSP Commands: opens the MSP Commands dialog box. See Figure 127. on page 167 and the relevant description.
Click on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window
Figure 130. Port view after Open Port View command

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14 TRANSMISSION VIEW 14.1 Overview

This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification and configuration of TPs, providing a representation of the entire signal flow. The generic Transmission View, described in this chapter, offers the possibility of displaying a single TP or a set of all kinds of TPs (or collected functionality which is represented by one/several TPs). To display the termination points in the Transmission View, either select specific TPs from a TP search dialog or access the view directly from another view, e.g. by navigating from the Port View. The Transmission View provides the following features: Brief overview regarding transmission resources. An overview concerning all TPs belonging to a port can be called in by activating the function to expand the selected TP. TP names are listed in an additional information area if the mouse pointer is positioned over it. The following states are indicated: the alarm state is indicated by the alarm synthesis icon the cross-connection state is indicated by a cross whether a TP can be structured is indicated by a circle whether a TP is under Performance Monitoring indicated by a blue P letter whether a TP is involved in a loop action, it is indicated by an arrow
An overview concerning signal flow can be requested by a user action. The user can select a TP and apply the action Show Cross-connected TPs. The result is that the objects related to the TP are displayed and lines indicate the connections. Expanding and hiding TPs that are related to the currently selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are above the TU-12 CTP) enables all related TPs to be added to the view, thus providing a representation of the entire signal flow.
Display of single or multiple termination points. Search for and select a termination point in a TP search dialog and display it in the Transmission View. Pop-up the Transmission View from the board view. All TPs/compound TPs associated with the physical port are displayed (i.e. TPs down to AU-4).
Provide the functionality to create/show cross-connections. Provide the functionality to create/show Multiplex Section Protection Provide the functionality to create/show Loopback commands. Provide the possibility of configuring a selected TP. This functionality is accessed by calling the configuration dialogs of the common Transmission/Port Views category. Provide the possibility of showing a detailed view of a TP with alarms, navigating to the Port view. Provide the possibility of showing and setting Performance Monitoring parameters and data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.2 View elements

The Transmission View uses the symbols illustrated in Figure 131.
AU4
Label indicates the type of TP Adaption function
Termination function
Compound Termination and Adaption function Structurable point Crossconnectable point with crossconnected TP or Alarm synthesis icon Tp under performance monitoring
Figure 131. Symbols Used in Transmission View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.3 View Layout

The Transmission View is a main view. It provides views of specific areas, which display the transmission resources, and the specific Transmission View pulldown menu which provides the Transmission View operations. 14.3.1 View Description Figure 132. illustrates the Transmission View area. TPs that are received from the network element are displayed in the Transmission View with the respective TP and connection symbols described in Figure 131. The number of TPs presented initially depends on whether the Transmission View is popped up from a board view, whether a TP has been selected in another view or whether it is called without a selected TP. When the Transmission view is reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu in its initial state contains no objects.
Figure 132. Transmission View Area
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.3.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View It is possible both to expand a VC-4, thus displaying all underlying TPs, and to hide TPs which are of no interest. The objects initially displayed depend on the situation/definition. 14.3.3 Naming TPs The following rules are applied in order to identify the TPs displayed: the root node contains the full user label, all child nodes contain a short label indicating the position inside the tree.
14.3.4 Dynamic View Behavior The following section describes the view states and provides a short description of events that affect the view. 14.3.4.1 Initial state of the view In its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects. Objects can be searched for and displayed using the Add TP dialog. 14.3.4.2 Working state of the view In its working state, the Transmission View already contains objects. If the operator searches for and displays a TP using the TP Search dialog, the view is first initialized again and then the TP is displayed. The same applies in the case of navigation from another view to the Transmission View the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. 14.3.4.3 Navigation to Transmission View from other views If the Transmission View is popped up from the Port View, only the selected TP is displayed. 14.3.4.4 Alarm notification Alarms concerning the TPs displayed are indicated graphically by the alarm synthesis icons of the TP objects. The TP objects are updated accordingly. 14.3.4.5 Object deletion All kinds of object deletion events related to TPs displayed are indicated by the TP objects. The graphical objects are removed accordingly from the Transmission View. Example: modification of the payload structure from 63 TU-12 to 3 TU-3.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.4 Transmission view access and menu

The Transmission view can be reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. In this case, in its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects. In the case of navigation from another view (example the Port view) to the Transmission View, the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it (see for example Figure 132. on page 175. Selecting the Transmission option in the menu bar of Figure 132. on page 175. the complete pull down Transmission menu is presented (Figure 133. ) The following menu items are available: Add TP Select the TP to show on the Transmission view. It is described in the following paragraph. Display TPs that are related to the selected TP. It is described in this chapter, see para 14.14.1 on page 208. Hide TPs that are related to the selected TP or the selected TP. It is described in this chapter, see para 14.14.2 on page 209 Set parameters for the Overhead on Synchronous TPs. It is described in this chapter, see para 14.6 on page 186 Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or ISDNPRA management See para. 14.7 on page 191
Expand
Hide
TP Configuration
TP Threshold Configuration Set B2 ExBER and Degraded Signal parameters. It is described in this paragraph, see para.14.8 on page 193. Terminate TP Terminate a path on a AU-4 CTP It is described in this chapter, see para 14.9 on page 194 Disterminate a path on a AU-4 CTP It is described in this chapter, see para 14.9 on page 194 See paragraph 11.5 on page 123 Manage the connection of the paths. See para. 15 on page 213 Create, configure and delete POM, SUT and TC TPs. It is described in this chapter, see para 14.10 on page 195 Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. See chapter 17 on page 269. Provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring selected TP It is described in this chapter, see para 14.11 on page 200 Manage the loopback commands, for commissioning or maintenance purposes. See paragraph 14.12 on page 201. Manage the physical TP setting. See para 14.13 on page 206.
Disterminate TP AU4 Concatenation: Cross-Connection Monitoring Operations
Performance
Structure TPs
Loopback
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Physical Media
ED
01
957.140.602 V
MSP
Show Supported Board
Navigate to the upper board level. It is described in this chapter, see para 14.14.3 on page 210 Permit to show the detailed alarm of the TP. It is described in this chapter, see 14.14.4 on page 211
Navigate to Port View
These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.
Figure 133. Transmission menu options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Not available for PDH port See paragraph 13.4 on page 161. In this paragraph is not described the MSP>NE MSP synthesis option of the Transmission menu, not used in this NE.
14.5 ADD TP
Select the Transmission > Add TP option.
This menu item opens the TP Search dialog (see Figure 134. ). The TP Search dialog enables the user to search for and add a TP to the Transmission View (e.g. search for all TPs on a board with PM enabled). 14.5.1 TP Search 14.5.1.1 Default Mode In this mode, the dialog displays the structure of the equipment tree. After double-clicking, e.g. on a port, the contents of the port appear on the right-hand side of the dialog (TP list). To keep the number of items displayed small, they are displayed in a hierarchical order. Double-click again to recall the next level (see Figure 136. ).
Figure 134. TP Search Dialog, Initial State After double-clicking on an object, an Information window appears (see Figure 135. ). The message text corresponds to the object selected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 135. Information Window The search can be stopped with Cancel.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 136. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections After clicking on Show CC State, a more detailed TP list is displayed (see Figure 137. ) containing TP cross connection status information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
It is possible to select several individual TPs from the TP list by clicking on them while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard. To select a block of TPs, click on the first TP and then click on the last TP in the block while holding down the Shift key on the keyboard. But only the first TP selected in the list will be shown in the Transmission View.
Figure 137. TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed The symbols in the TP list have the following significance: Not connected Unidirectonal connected from and to Bidirectional connected Not allowed Figure 138. Symbols in TP Search The background color of the symbols represents the status of the TP: grey = inactive green = active
An easy way to recall to previously displayed boards is to use Board History. Select the relevant board from the list.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 139. Board History Check List 14.5.1.2 Search Mode Use Search Mode together with the filtering options provided below the TP list (see Figure 140. ). The following options are available: Class: Ignore, TU-12, VC-12, VC-12+TU-12, TU-3, VC-3, VC-3+TU-3, AU-4, VC-4, VC-4+AU-4. Connection State (Current connectivity status): Ignore, not connected, connected Alarm State (Path Trace): Ignore, critical, major, minor, warning, not alarmed Assign State: Ignore, NML, EML Perf. Monitoring (Performance Monitoring condition): Ignore, enabled TTI expect: not used TTI receive: not used TTI transmit: not used Location:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Permits to insert the location of the TP in the following format: r<rack#>sr<subrack#>sl<slot#><port#>

Name: not supported
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 140. TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options After activating the search process with the Search TP button, the following dialog box appears. The search can be interrupted by clicking on Cancel.
Figure 141. Information... Dialog for Search Process N.B.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When searching for PM-enabled TPs on NE, Rack or Subrack, the time for the request can be very high. It is recommended to search for PM-enabled TPs at the board level (a board is selected for the search).
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.5.1.3 Common Buttons The following buttons are available in all modes: 14.5.1.3.1 Ok Closes the dialog and opens the Transmission View containing the selected TP, as for the example of Figure 132. on page 175. 14.5.1.3.2 Close Closes the dialog without updating the Transmission View. 14.5.1.3.3 Print This command is used to generate and print a list of TPs according to the current filter selection (refer to Figure 144. for an example of a printout). The command opens the following dialog:
Figure 142. Print to Printer Select the desired printer from the list box and click on Ok to start the print job or abort with Cancel. The dialog changes after clicking on File:
Figure 143. Print to File

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Enter the name of the output file in the input field or select a file name from the File Select dialog by clicking on Select file. Select if the output format should be Postscript or ASCII.
The output file is generated after clicking on Ok. Use Cancel to stop the process.
Figure 144. Example Printout 14.5.1.3.4 Help This command opens the online help for the TP-Search dialog.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.6 TP Configuration
Select the Transmission > TP Configuration option . TP Configuration can also be accessed from the Port view menu. 14.6.1 High Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected, a dialog appears for the configuration of the main parameters of the following objects: VC-4 TTP (140 Mbit/s PDH) VC-3 TTP (34 and 45 Mbit/s PDH) Mod VC-4 TTP (matrix resource)
The main parameters are: C2 Signal Label: Automatic (decided by the NE) or Equipped not specific. J1 Path Trace.
The dialogs of the following figure appears:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 145. High Order TP Configuration
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.6.1.1 J1 Path Trace Operative only on VC4 in current release.

If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by NE. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes, it is filled with zero bytes (0 hexadecimal). Received fields is read only. With the relevant button the operator can set the Expected field as: TTI Enable TTI Disable TTI Repeated
The Transmitted field can be set with TTI Enable or TTI Repeated byte Empty TTI button permits to send an all zeroes path trace. To replace modified with the default, enter the default manually according to the following table. Table 2. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label TP VC4 TTP / AU4 CTP (SDH) C2 VC4 TTP (PDH) C2 VC3TTP VC12 TTP
Significant Byte
C2
V5
Default value
18
14.6.1.2 C2 Signal Label Received and Expected fields are read only. They can display the following number, according the G.707 recommendations for the C2 Signal Label: 0: Unequipped 1: Equipped non-specific 2: TUG structure 3: Locked TU-n 4: Asynchronous 34/45Mbyte 18: Asynchronous 140Mbyte 19: ATM 20: MAN, DQDB 21: FDDI. In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: Automatic: the C2 Signal Label value is automatically selected by the NE according the VC structure. Equipment not specific (it corresponds to number 1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.6.2 J0 Section Trace management Select RST block and then select Port> TP Configuration. The fields of the following figure appears:
Figure 146. J0 Configuration This function is implemented in order to manage the J0 Trace configuration. This dialog shows the current values for received, expected and transmitted trail trace and it allows the operator to change only the values of expected and transmitted trail trace. The received trail trace is readonly. Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. With the relevant button it is possible to enable or disable TTI Monitoring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.6.3 Low Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected, a dialog to configure the main parameters of the following objects:
VC-12 TTP.
The main parameters are: V5 Signal Label. Automatic (decided by the NE) or Equipped not specific. J2 Path Trace. Not operative in current release.
The following dialogs appears:
Figure 147. Low Order TP Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.6.3.1 J2 Path Trace Not operative in current release. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by the NE. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes, it is filled with zero bytes (0 hexadecimal). Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. Mode1 enable the 16 bytes long sequence for Path trace One repeated byte allows to set one byte that will be repeated. Received fields is read only. With the relevant button it is possible to enable or Disable TTI Monitoring. Empty TTI send an all zeroes path trace.
14.6.3.2 V5 Signal Label Received, Expected and Transmitted fields are read only. They can display the following number, according the G.707 recommendations for the V5 Signal Label: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Unequipped Equipped non-specific Asynchronous Bit Synchronous Byte Synchronous
In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: Automatic: the C2 Signal Label value is automatically selected by the NE according the VC structure. Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1)
To replace modified with the default, enter the default manually according to the value reported in Table 2. on page 187.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration

This command is available for:
P12
Select the Transmission >TP Frame Mode Configuration option. TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the Port and Synchronization view menu. This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access and G.703/G.704 frame management. The following dialog appears:
Figure 148. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: Framed Signal Mode that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode; the user can choose one of the following value:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Not Framed (G.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activated ; Framed without PRA (G.704): the behavior according to ETS 300233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state, defect detection and consequent action; Framed with PRA : PRA function are activated Framed with leased line PRA : a proprietary leased line behavior is applied. 01 SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 191 / 386
ED
957.140.602 V
CRC4 Mode that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe: Enabling: enable or disable the CRC4 error counting Remote Indication: readonly field that indicates if status of CRC4 error counting functionality of farend NE is enabled or disabled
Frame Status that reports an indication of the received signal: no indication the 2Mb/s signal is multiframe
Press Ok to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.8 TP Threshold Configuration

This menu allows the operator to set the alarm thresholds for MST and VCi layer.
Select the MST or the VCi block. Select the Transmission > TP Threshold Configuration option. Figure 149. will be opened. The user can select one of the two different Defect distribution: Poisson distribution enable configuration of the Excessive Bit Error Ratio (ExBER on MST, VCi) threshold and of the Signal Degrade (SD on MST, VCi) threshold of the TPs related counted primitives. Bursty distribution enable configuration of the maximum number of errored frames and the total amount of bad block per frame. ExBER Threshold : 103 to 105 Enable Consequent Actions : fixed to enabled Signal Degrade Threshold : 105 to 109 Bursty Parameters Threshold : 1 or 10 or 100 or 1000 Bursty Parameters Consecutive Bad Seconds : 2 to 10
Figure 149. Degraded Signal Threshold selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on Ok to confirm the chosen parameters.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.9 Terminate/Disterminate TP
Select the Transmission > Terminate TP or Disterminate TP option. Only one command in the menu is available, depending on whether a TP is terminated or not. 14.9.1 Terminate TP Use this action to terminate a path. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. A cross-connection between the selected AU-4 CTP (= aTP) and a modifiable VC-4 TTP (= bTP) is created. Three TUG-3 and TU-3 are created if the modifiable VC-4 TTP was not already structured. A cross appears in the icon of the terminated TP:
If the TP is already cross-connected a error message appears. 14.9.2 Disterminate TP Use this action to disterminate a path. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. The related cross-connection is deleted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.10 Monitoring Operations

Select the Transmission > Monitoring Operations option as for the following figure.
Creation/Deletion and Configuration options are presented.
Monitoring Operations can also be accessed from the Port view menu. The commands of this menu item are for the management of the POM/SUT/TC (Path Overhead Monitoring, Supervised Unequipped Termination and Tandem Connection). This command is available for: AU-4 CTP TU-3 CTP TU-12 CTP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.10.1 Creation/Deletion This dialog allows multiple object creation/deletion. The dialog shown in the following Figure 150. opens:
Figure 150. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion The Path Overhead Monitoring has the following parameters: Before Matrix (available only on AU4 CTP) After Matrix
The Supervisory Unequipped Termination, not operative in current release, has the following parameters: Sink (before matrix) Sink (after matrix) Source Bidirectional
The Tandem Connection has the following configurable parameters: Tandem Connections Monitoring (TCM): TCM Before Matrix TCM After Matrix Tandem Connection Termination (TCT): TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix TCT Bidirectional After Matrix
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Press Ok to apply the parameters or Close to close the dialog and discard the not with Ok applied changes.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
When select and apply the Path Overhead Monitoring, the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner:
Figure 151. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) When select and apply the Tandem Connection Monitoring / Tandem Connection Termination, the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner:
Figure 152. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example) Also refer to para. 11.9 on page 138, about navigation to Monitoring View.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.10.2 Configuration Depending on the parameters selected in the Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion dialog, not all sections of the dialog are available. NOTE: It is possible to open the POM and TCT/TCM Configuration dialog for a CTP even if neither PathOverheadMonitor nor Tandem Connection was created before (SUT isnt available in this release). No changes can be made in this case and the values displayed can be ignored.
Figure 153. Monitor Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
TTI Definition The TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) has a maximum length of 16 characters.
The following TTI Definitions are available: TTI Expected TTI Received without the display TTI Sent
The following TTI Types are available: TTI Enabled TTI Disabled TTI Repeated Byte
Error Distribution Poisson and Bursty error distribution are supported.
TCM/TCT ConsActions It is needed to support explicit consequent action activation (AIS insertion) for TCT sink and bidirectional.
Thresholds Set the thresholds of the following parameters: Signal Degrade Poisson mode only: from 105 to 109. Excessive Error Poisson mode only: from 103 also if presented a selection from 103 to 105 Bursty Degrade Select a value between 1 and 1000 errors/sec for the Bursty Degrade threshold. Bursty Consecutive Select a value between 2 and 10 sec for the Bursty Degrade Consecutive.
Alarm Timing Raising and Clearing Timing are not supported by OMSN.
Unequipped Trail Not available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.11 Structure TPs

Select the Transmission > Structure TPs option as for the following figure.
This menu item provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring a selected TP. The level that is selected defines how the signal is to be structured, e.g. if a VC-4 TTP is selected and the menu item TU-12 is chosen, the signal is structured down to 63 TU-12 CTPs. The following menu items represent all those possible: TU-2. Not supported. TU-3. TU-12. VC-3/VC-4. Not supported. VC-12. Not supported.
The following items are available for synchronous TPs:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
modifiable VC-4 TTP: TU-3, TU-12 TUG-3: TU-3, TU-12 TUG-2: TU-12.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.12 Loopback
The commands of this menu item are for the management of the loopback commands, for commissioning or maintenance purposes. 14.12.1 Loopback Configuration The loopbacks can be applied at line (external to equipment) level or at internal equipment level. The loopback commands are used to separate the communication network into independent part checking the line/equipment functionality during the network installation or maintenance operation. The loopback architecture provides four configurations ( see Figure 154. ). Line Loopback And Continue Line Loopback And AIS Internal Loopback And Continue Internal Loopback and AIS
Initial
Destination
Line
Internal
Line
Destination
AIS
Initial
Line Loop And Continue
Line Loop And AIS
Destination
Initial
AIS
Line
Internal
Line
Initial
Destination
Internal loop And Continue
Internal loop And AIS
Figure 154. Loopback configurations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Select a TP that supports the Loopback Configuration Loopbacks act on the following TPs: PDH board (only from the Port View): Line loopback performed on: P for 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s PPI Internal loopback performed on: p12 for 2 Mbit/s CTP p31 for 34/45 Mbit/s CTP p4 for 140Mbit/s CTP
SDH board: The loopback configuration can be done only on SDH ports with the acronym ending with a N letter (i.e. P4S1N, S4.1N, L4.1N, L4.2N, etc.) Line loopback performed on: EIS for electrical STM1 SPI OpS for optical STM1, STM4, STM16 SPI Internal loopback performed on: MsT TTP for STM1, STM4, STM16 ports
Select the Transmission > Loopback > Port Loopback Configuration option as for the following figure. Port Loopback Configuration can also be accessed from the Port view menu.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 155. opens.
Figure 155. Port Loopbacks View Choose the TP clicking on the Choose TP button. Select the TP where to apply the loopback command. For the TP selection procedure, follow the TP research description reported in para. 14.5.1 on page 179. For this NE the Timed Loopbacks field is not managed and thus Start/Stop loopbacks time is not editable.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.12.2 Loopback Management To manage the loopback configuration select the Transmission > Loopback > Loopback Management option as for the following figure.
Loopback Management can also be accessed from the Port view menu and from the Configuration menu. Figure 156. opens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 156. Loopback Management
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The configured loopback are listed into the current loopbacks table. This table can be managed by the Search criteria, Delete and Create commands.
Search Criteria (not operative): to configure the filter select the Loop and Continue type (Yes= Loop And Continue, No= Loop And AIS) then select the Directionality Internal or Line and edit the Initial TP Id (write: rack, subrack, board, port# and the TP type: EIS (SPI/PPI Electrical), OpS (SPI/PPI Optical), MST and so on. For Initial TP has to be intended the outgoing signal while for Destination TP the incoming signal. Enable the filter through the Toggle Filter Enable/Disable button. Click on the Search button to start the configured loopback research into the current loopback table. The Delete command permits to delete a loopback listed in the Current loopbacks Table: select a loopback in the list and click on the Delete button. The Create command permits to create a new loopback configuration: clicking on Create the previous figure ( Figure 155. ) opens. Follow the previously paragraph indications to create a new loopback configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.13 Physical Media

Select the Transmission > Physical Media option as for the following figure.
The Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP. It opens a menu in which the various options will be available according the TPs type (for the option common with the Port view reference is made to the relevant paragraph):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ALS Management. Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration. Extra traffic Regeneration Section management Line Length Configuration Set Domain HDSL Configuration NT Configuration X21 Configuration SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
See para. 11.6.1 on page 126. See para.11.6.2 on page 129. See para.18.2.11 on page 312. See para.11.6.3 on page 130. Not operative Not operative See para.11.6.5 on page 133. See para. 14.13.1 on page 207. Not operative Not operative Not operative
ED
01
957.140.602 V
3AL 80755 BA AA 386
206 / 386
14.13.1 Set Domain This option is referred to the SECurity management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the selected TP. Select the block: EIS for Electrical SDH port, OpS for Optical SDH port, P (PPI) for PDH port. Select the Set Domain option from the Physical Media cascade menu to present the following view: The dialogbox contains the following fields: NML Assignment: each connected manager to the TP is highlighted in the list. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination. Several manager can be enabled contemporaneously, having in charge the TP. The Manager List contains the list of managers ( i.e. RM, SY, NPOS , EML) that work on the NE. The EMLUSM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i.e. the Manager misses the NE connection). Resource domain field allow to select the domain among that displayed in the list, assigning it to the TP. The different domains could be assigned to different operators.
OK button is used to validate the selection. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 157. Set Domain
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.14 Navigation Commands

14.14.1 Expand Select the Transmission > Expand option as for the following figure.
This menu item provides the possibility of displaying TPs that are related to the selected TP. These may be TPs that are contained by the TP or TPs which belong to the physical port that is actually connected to the TP. Show next level of lower TPs, Show all lower TPs, Show next level of upper TPs, Show all upper TPs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.14.2 Hide Select the Transmission > Hide option as for the following figure.
This menu item provides the possibility of hiding all upper/lower TPs of a selected TP and the deletion of a selected TP. Lower TPs, Upper TPs, Selected TPs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.14.3 Show Supported Board Select the Transmission > Show Supported Board option. This menu provides the possibility of navigating directly to the board that supports the TP. The Board View appears:
Figure 158. Board View (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
14.14.4 Navigate to Port View Select the Transmission > Navigate to Port View option.
This menu provides the possibility of navigating to the corresponding Port View related to the selected TP in order to access a detailed overview of alarms quickly. The Port View appears:
Figure 159. Port View
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
212 / 386
15 CROSS-CONNECTION MANAGEMENT 15.1 Introduction

15.1.1 Overview The purpose of this domain is to manage the connection of the high and low level path. The following chapters provide the user with information concerning operations on cross-connections: Para. 15.1.2 on page 214 Multiplex Structures for SDH gives an overview on the SDH technology Para. 15.1.3 on page 217 Definition of Termination Points gives an overview about the termination points implemented on the NE Para. 15.1.5 on page 222 Cross-Connection Types provides information concerning cross-connection types supported by the NE Para. 15.1.6 on page 224 Cross-Connection Protection provides information concerning cross-connection protection supported by the NE Para. 15.2 on page 226 Operative sequence to execute Cross-Connections details the complete procedure to realize cross-connection Para. 15.3 on page 228 Cross-Connections Management details the contents of the main cross-connections view Para. 15.4 on page 234 Create/Modify Cross-Connections describes the creation and modification of cross-connections Para. 15.5 on page 249 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections describes the activation, deactivation and deletion of cross-connections. Activation and deactivation not supported in current release. Para. 15.6 on page 250 Split and Join Cross-Connections describes how to split or join bidirectional cross-connections. Para. 15.7 on page 253 Protection Switching deals with switching actions (force, manual, lockout protection) on cross-connections Para. 15.8 on page 255 Print deals with printing out list entries on printers or into files Para. 15.9 on page 256 Show Cross-Connected TPs describes the possibility of showing connections between two or more TPs of different different hierarchies, e.g. connection between au4 and vc4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.1.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH By introducing the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), a standardized transmission has been created, matching the European with the American standard. The SDH signal structure contains an extended overhead as well as a fixed pointer controlled assignment of the user signal elements, thus improving the possibilities of the network management. Signals of the Synchronous and Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) are packed by synchronous multiplexers into Virtual Containers (VC). The STM-1 signal structure is achieved by using the multiplex structure complying with ITU-T and ETSI, (see Figure 160. ). Each of the user channels (2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s) is packed into a container synchronous to the STM-1 frame according to a predefined structure. To adjust the plesiochronous signals to the synchronous network clock, certain filling algorithms are available. Fix fill bits are inserted into synchronous signals. A byte column (9 Byte) as Path Overhead (POH) is added to the Container (C) generated. Path Overhead and Container together form the Virtual Container (VC). With the pointer pointing to the start of the VC, in respect of the STM-1 frame, an Administrative Unit (AU) or if several Containers of a group are to be combined a Tributary Unit (TU) is generated. Several TUs form a Tributary Unit Group (TUG) and TUGs again can be combined into a VC. The AU of the signal, together with the Section Overhead (SOH), finally make up the STM-1 frame.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
x1 C4 x1 TUG3 x3 x3 VC4 AU4 STM1 xN STMN VC3 TU3 C3 x7 x1 C2 x3 C12 x4 C11 VC11 TU11 VC12 TU12 VC2 TU2 TUG2 x7 Legend: VC3 AU3 C VC TU TUG AU : Container : Virtual Container : Tributary Unit : Tributary Unit Group : Administrative Unit Pointer -Processing not implemented
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
140 Mbit/s
(45 Mbit/s) 34 Mbit/s
6 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
(1,5 Mbit/s)
Figure 160. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.707
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
215 / 386
The STM-1 frame consists of: a Section Overhead (SOH) an AU Pointer area a payload area 270 Columns (Bytes) 1 1 Section Overhead SOH 3 4 9 rows 5 AU Pointer Payload 9 270
Section Overhead SOH 9 Figure 161. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy The STM-1 frame has a basic bit rate of 155.520 Mbit/s. A single user channel is packed into a Virtual Container. These Virtual Containers are of different size and may be nested or packed differently. Virtual Containers for the European bit rates: the STM-1 frame contains a VC-4, a VC-4 may contain one C-4 or three TUG-3, each TUG-3 may contain one VC-3 or seven TUG-2, each TUG-2 contains three VC-12 or one VC-2.
An STM-1 user signal can be constructed of:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
either 1 x VC-4 or 3 x VC-3 or 2 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 or 2 x VC-3 + 21 x VC-12 or 1 x VC-3 + 14 x VC-2 or 1 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 or 21 x VC-2 or 14 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 or 7 x VC-2 + 42 x VC-12 or 63 x VC-12.
STM-N signals are constructed by integer multiples of the basic signal STM-1 of 155.520 Mbit/s. For example an STM-16 signal of 2.488.320 Mbit/s is generated by combining sixteen STM-1 signals byte interleaved.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.1.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP) When ports are depicted on the user interface, the following abbreviations are used.
This section concerns the multiplex structure (see Figure 160. ) as well as on the information model of object-oriented programming which was used when forming the user interface. As a rule, a Termination Point (TP) is the starting and terminating point of a transmission segment. A distinction is made between the following types of TPs: CTP (Connection Termination Point) The CTP represents the termination of a connection. The transmission signal is terminated, i.e., the received signal is monitored and the error signaling evaluated, while own-code signaling is inserted in the transmitted signal. TTP (Trail Termination Point) The TTP represents the termination of a transmission segment. The signal is monitored and passed on after modification in one form or another.
Both TP types exist on the SDH level and the PDH level. CTPs on SDH level On SDH level (see Figure 162. ) a distinction is made between the following CTPs: AU-4 (Connection Termination Point) The AU-4 CTP represents both the creation and termination of an STM-1 connection. The High-order Connection Supervision (HCS) function is included. TU-x (Connection Termination Point), i.e. TU-12 CTP, TU-2 CTP, TU-3 CTP. The TU-x CTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-x connection. The Low-order Connection Supervision (LCS) function is included.
CTPs on PDH level On PDH level (see Figure 163. ), a distinction is made between the following CTPs: E4 (Connection Termination Point) The E4-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of incoming 140 Mbit/s PPI. S4 (Connection Termination Point) The S4-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of outgoing 140 Mbit/s PPI . E32 (Connection Termination Point) The E32-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of incoming 45 Mbit/s PPI. S32 (Connection Termination Point) The S3-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of outgoing 45 Mbit/s PPI . E31 (Connection Termination Point) The E31-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of incoming 34 Mbit/s PPI. S31 (Connection Termination Point) The S31-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of outgoing 34 Mbit/s PPI . E1 (Connection Termination Point) The E1-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of incoming 2 Mbit/s PPI. The Mon.(Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal. S1 (Connection Termination Point) The S1-CTP represents the nonintrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI . The Mon.(Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal. 01 SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 217 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
957.140.602 V
TTPs on SDH level On SDH level (see Figure 162. ) a distinction is made between the following TTPs: ES (Electrical Section TTP) An ESTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with electrical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). OS (Optical Section TTP) An OSTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with optical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). RST (Regenerator Section TTP) An RSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an RSOH (Regenerator Section Overhead), i.e., rows 1 to 3 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. MST (Multiplexer Section TTP) An MSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an MSOH (Multiplexer Section Overhead), i.e., rows 5 to 9 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. VC-4 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path.
TTPs on PDH level On PDH level (see Figure 163. ) a distinction is made between the following TTPs: PPI (Trail Termination Point) On the PDH side, an PPITTP corresponds to the ESTTP of the synchronous side. Depending on the type, it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s, a 45MBit/s, a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. E4 (Trail Termination Point) The E4-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 140 Mbit/s connection. E3 (Trail Termination Point) The E3-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 34 Mbit/s connection. E2 (Trail Termination Point) The E2-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of an 8 Mbit/s connection. VC-4 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. VC-3 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-3 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-3 path. VC-12 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-12 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-12 path.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSP definition Transmit side, the MSNP (AU4CTP) input enters two different MSNP/MSN (unProtected CTP) sources and then the MSNTTP working and protection sources (to insert the K1K2 bytes) are sent to the own SPI interfaces. Receive side, the working and protection MSN/MSNP outputs (AU4CTP) enter in the switching selector. The MSNPTTP terminates the selected signal and checks the SSF and the MSP protocol failure.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
ESTTP/OSTTP
RSTTP
MSTTP
AU4 CTP
VC-4 TTP
TUG3
TUG3
TUG3
TU3 CTP
TUG2 TUG2
TUG2 TUG2
TUG2 TUG2
TUG2
TU2 CTP
TU12 CTP
TU12 CTP
TU12 CTP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 162. SDH Transport Level Diagram
ED
01
957.140.602 V
PPITTP
140 Mbit/s E4CTP E4TTP 4 VC4 TTP E3TTP 4 E2TTP 4 E1CTP
45 MBit/s
34 Mbit/s E31-CTP
2 Mbit/s E1CTP
E32-CTP
E3TTP 4
VC3 TTP
VC3 TTP
E2TTP 4 E1CTP
VC12 TTP
VC12 TTP
VC12 TTP
Number of branches
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 163. PDH Transport Level Diagram
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.1.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names The TP names on the 1660SM reflect the software model the user interface is based on. Therefore they differ from the TP names given in the ITU-T recommendations. The following tables list the TP names mapping conventions in the Transmission View. Table 3. PDH TPs
ITUT PPITTP E4 CTP S4 CTP E31 CTP S31 CTP E32 CTP S32 CTP E1 CTP S1 CTP E4 TTP E3 TTP E2 TTP VC4 TTP VC3 TTP VC12 TTP
Table 4. SDH TPs
TP names on 1660SM P eCTP p4 eCTP p31 eCTP p32 eCTP p12Mon not supported not supported not supported Vc4 Vc3 Vc12
ITUT ESTTP OSTTP RSTTP MSTTP MSP AU4 CTP AU44c CTP VC4 TTP TUG3 TUG2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TP names on 1660SM ElS OpS RST MST MSP Au4/Au4P Au4P-4c Vc4 Tug3 Tug2 Tu3 Tu2 Tu12
TU3 CTP TU2 CTP TU12 CTP ED

01
957.140.602 V
15.1.5 Cross-Connection Types A cross-connection represents the logical connection between the input and output of the matrix, called the matrix port. The matrix only receives and transmits signals in GTI format. The Generic Transport Interface GTI, Alcatels standardized signal format for internal interfaces, is similar to the STM-1 format. The incoming signals are mapped or converted to GTI format on the plesiochronous and synchronous I/O boards. This frame is based on the STM-1 frame specified by ITU-T Recommendation G.707. It enables the transport of all signals in the US hierarchy and ETSI hierarchy levels 1 to 4 (1.5 Mbit/s to 140 Mbit/s) mapped to Virtual Containers (VCs) (see Figure 160. ). The VCs are sent from the I/O boards to both copies of the Matrix (A and B) via the GTI. The matrix performs the cross-connection on the VC-4, VC-3, VC-2 or VC-12 level and transfers the VCs to the relevant I/O boards via GTI. The configuration of both matrix copies is always identical. On the I/O boards, one GTI signal is selected from Copy A or Copy B, based on quality. The NE supports unidirectional, bidirectional and broadcast connections unprotected as well as protected. 15.1.5.1 Unidirectional Connection Information is transmitted exclusively from the input port to the output port (point-to-point); there is no routing in reverse direction.

input TP

output TP
Figure 164. Unidirectional Connection 15.1.5.2 Bidirectional Connection Information is transmitted between input port and output port in both directions (point-to-point).

input TP

output TP
Figure 165. Bidirectional Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.1.5.3 Broadcast Connection (Multi-leg / Multipoint) In contrast to a cross-connection between just two points (point-to-point), one source and one sink, a broadcast connection consist of one source and several sinks, different legs that share the same source TP. In the example below, information is broadcast from one input to outputs A, B and C on three legs.

input TP
leg 1 leg 2 leg 3

output A output B output C
Figure 166. Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs
A warning box indicates when the resources available for broadcast connections are exhausted. N.B. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.1.6 Cross-Connection Protection 15.1.6.1 Protected Unidirectional Connection A unidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output (primary route). In the case of a failure, the system automatically switches to the protection path from protection Input B to the Output. This second connection is permanently kept in hot standby operation (see Figure 167. ).

input A prot. input B
in case of failure

output TP
Figure 167. Protected Unidirectional Connection 15.1.6.2 Protected Bidirectional Connection A bidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output C (primary route). Input A (input protected see Figure 168. ) can be protected:

A B
in case of failure
Figure 168. Bidirectional Connection Input Protected N.B. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.1.6.3 Protected Broadcast Connection The protected broadcast is realized as a set of independent, protected, unidirectional connections using the same pair of input termination points, as illustrated in Figure 169. Each protection can be forced, locked out or switched independently. Therefore, if a failure occurs at a certain input, it is possible that only some of the protections of the protected broadcast actually switch to the protection input.

input A prot. input B
leg 1 leg 2
in case of failure
leg 3

output A output B output C
Figure 169. Protected Broadcast Figure 169. shows a broadcast connection from input A to outputs A, B and C. Leg 2 and 3 are protected via input B, whereas leg 1 is not protected. In current release only one out of N legs can be protected. 15.1.6.4 Drop and Continue Connection A Drop and Continue connection is a composed by: (see Figure 170. ) a unidirectional connection routed from Input A to the Output C and also to Input protecting B. a unidirectional connection from Input protecting B to Output C. a unidirectional connection from Output C to Input A.
Output C is protected; when receive from Input main the connection is defined normal, when receive from Input Protecting main the connection is defined inverse. All the connections are created in a single step of configuration.

A Input

C Output

B Prot. input
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 170. Drop and Continue Normal
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections

This paragraphs list the complete procedure to realize cross-connection moving among the various menus. Three main cases have been considered: an high order signal cross connection (AU4) an high order concatenated signal cross connection (AU4c) a low order signal cross connection (example : TU12)
Procedure for high order signal (AU4) Select Transmission option from the View menu Select Transmission Cross Connection Cross Connection Management Click on Create in the Cross Connection Management windows; a new window called Main Cross Connection is opened. Select the correct value in the fields Type and Protection
Click on Choose relative to the Input field; a new window called TP search is opened. On the Equipment field select the Board, in the Termination Points field select the AU4
Click on OK; the TP search window is closed. In the Main Cross Connection window repeat the same on the Output field and on the Prot. Input field for protected connections Click on OK in the Main Cross Connection window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on Cancel to go to the Cross Connection Management window. Click on Search in the Cross Connection Management window to see the new crossconnection created.
Procedure for AU4 concatenated (AU4c) N.B. Before to create an AU4 concatenated crossconnection is necessary to define that the AU4s on a STM4 or STM16 board are concatenated as explained in para 11.5 on page 123. Select Transmission option from the Views menu Select Transmission Cross Connection Cross Connection Management Click on Create in the Cross Connection Management window; a new window called Main Cross Connection is opened. Select the correct value in the fields Type and Protection
Click on Choose relative to the Input field; a new window called TP search is opened. On the Equipment field select the Board, in the Termination Points field select the concatenated AU4c (syntax example: r01sr1sl24/port#01#01AU4P4c )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Click on OK; the TP search window is closed. In the Main Cross Connection window repeat the same on the Output field and on the Prot. Input field for protected connections 01 SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 226 / 386
ED
957.140.602 V
Click on OK in the Main Cross Connection window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on Cancel to go to the Cross Connection Management window. Click on Search in the Cross Connection Management window to see the new crossconnection created.
Procedure low order signal (example TU12) Select Transmission option from the View menu Select Transmission Add TP; a new window called Tp search is opened. On the Equipment field select the Board, In the Termination Points field select the AU4 and click on OK; In the transmission window the AU4 block is displayed;
Select Transmission Terminate TP ; a cross is displayed on the AU4 block Click twice on the AU4 block and on the VC4 block that appears, then selecting the showed TUG3 Select Transmission Structure TPs then selecting the structure N.B. The AU4 is then terminated on a VC4 of the MATRIX unit. The VC4 is automatically choosed and indicated as port # n, where n is the VC4 number. This connection will appear on the Cross Connection Management view in a independent line.
If TU12 (example) are selected, in the transmission window clicking twice on the TUG3 and TUG2 blocks the TU12 are displayed Select the TU12 to be used Select Transmission Cross Connection Cross Connection Management; a new window called Cross Connection Management is opened. In the Cross Connection Management window click on Create button; a new window called Main Cross Connection is opened. Select the correct value in the fields Type and Protection
Click on Choose relative to the Input field; a new window called TP search is opened. On the Equipment field select the Board, In the Termination Points field select the structured TP (example: TU12 1.1.1)
Click on OK; the TP search window is closed. Repeat the same on the Output field and on the Prot. Input field for protected connections Click on OK in the Main Cross Connection window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on Cancel to go to the Cross Connection Management window. Click on Search in the Cross Connection Management window to see the new crossconnection created.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.3 Cross-Connections management

A list of cross-connections can be displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog (see Figure 173. on page 232). The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view or via Configuration menu as indicated in Figure 171. Transmission view is presented with the View Transmission pull down menu. Port view is presented with the View Equipment pull down menu, then clicking on the presented objects with the sequence board>port.
Figure 171. Cross connection management cascade menu The Cross-Connection Management dialog is initially empty (see Figure 172. on page 230). A list of cross-connections is displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog after selecting the Search command. There are two possibilities of displaying a list of cross-connections: do not enter any search criteria and press the Search button to display a list of all existing cross-connections, enter Search Criteria (one or more) and then press the Search button to display a selection of cross-connections. Set Ignore for attributes not to be used as filtering criteria.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Use button Cancel Search to cancel an active search request or close the dialog.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.3.1 Search Criteria

Name (not supported in current release) Number of the crossconnection (automatically assigned)
ACD (not supported in current release) Enter the Access Control Domain of the relevant cross-connections: E= connection made with 1353SH, M= connection made with 1354RM, empty= connection made with CT. This filter option can only be used, if at least one ACD is defined on the NE and one or more cross-connections are assigned to this ACD(s).
Type Select the connection type: Unidirectional Bidirectional Multipoint Drop&Continue
Protection Select protection functionality: Protected Not protected
TP Class Select one of the TP types involved in the requested cross-connection. State Select the connection state: Activated Deactivated (not operative in current release, the connection state is always Activated) Prot. State Select the protection state (for more detailed information, refer to Chapter 9.5): Forced to Input Forced to Protecting Manual Switch to Input Manual Switch to Protecting Auto. Switch to Input Auto. Switch to Protecting Lockout Normal I Normal P TP ID Prefix Enter the TP type and physical location of the port, or only the physical location at least down to board level, according to the following format:
r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP (see Figure 173. on page 232)

The # within brackets identifies a number.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 172. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State)
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
230 / 386
15.3.2 Cross-Connection List After a successful search, a read only list of cross-connections matching the search criteria appears (see Figure 173. ). The number of matching cross-connections is displayed in the upper left corner of the list. The list contains information concerning the following parameters for each cross-connection:
Prot. State detailed switching information in the format: <protection state> <traffic ind> (<location>:<signal state><switch status>, [<location>:<signal state><switch status>]) <protection state> Normal, Auto, Lockout, Forced or Manual. <traffic ind> indicates the location of current traffic: P (Protecting input) or I (Input). <location> indicates the location of the errored signal: P (Protecting input) or I (Input) <signal state> indicates the signal state: SD (Signal Degrade) or SF (Signal Failure) <switch status> status of the switch: c (completed) or p (pending)
Example: Auto I (P:SD-c) There has been an Automatic switch from the protecting input to the Input where the traffic is currently located. The reason for the automatic switch was Signal Degrade in the Protecting input. The switch was completed. State connection state indicating whether cross-connection is A(ctivated) or D(eactivated) Dir. Direction-related connection type: uni(directional), bi(directional), mp (multipoint), DC_N (Drop & Continue Normal) or DC_I (Drop & Continue Inverse) Input signal source; contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format <rack#><subr.#><board#><port#>,<port#>#TP (see Figure 173. on page 232) The # within brackets identifies a number. Protecting Input protecting source (for protected cross-connections only); contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP (see Figure 173. on page 232)

The # within brackets identifies a number.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
At the bottom of the dialog is a range of buttons to start actions on the listed cross-connections. Before starting any action apart from creation or printing, mark at least one cross-connection. To mark several cross-connections (multi-select) that are listed in succession, select the first cross-connection of a block with a mouse click and the last one with a mouse click while pressing the <Shift> key. Or, mark a number of individual cross-connections by clicking the mouse button while pressing the <Control> key. Deselect cross-connections by clicking on the respective row while simultaneously pressing the <Control> key. To deselect a number of cross-connections at a time, press the <Shift> key and hold it down while moving the mouse pointer to the last entry. All actions that may affect traffic must be confirmed. A confirmation dialog pops up in this case and the user has to confirm the requested action.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 173. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Output signal destination for point-to-point cross-connections, the TP ID of the destination is specified according to the format r<rack#>s<subr.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP ; for multi-leg cross-connections, the string multiple Legs appears instead.
15.3.3 Actions available The following actions are available:

Create a crossconnection (see chapter 15.4 on page 234) The Main Cross-Connection dialog (see Figure 177. on page 241) is opened.
Modify a Cross-Connection (see chapter 15.4 on page 234) Available if just one cross-connection is selected from the list. The Main Cross-Connection dialog (see Figure 177. on page 241) is opened. Activate a Cross-Connection (see chapter 15.5 on page 249) Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not operative in current release. Deactivate a Cross-Connection (see chapter 15.5 on page 249) Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not operative in current release. Delete a Cross-Connection (see chapter 15.5 on page 249) Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Split a Cross-Connection (see paragraph 15.6.1 on page 252) Available if at least one bidirectional cross connection is selected from the list. Join Cross-Connections (see paragraph 15.6.2 on page 252) Available if two cross connections are selected. Protection Switching (see chapter 15.7 on page 253) Available if exactly one protected cross-connection is selected from the list. The Protection Actions dialog is opened. Print (see chapter 15.8 on page 255) Prints the filtered list of cross-connections.
The dialog has to be closed explicitly.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections

Creation and modification of cross-connections are performed in the Main Cross-Connection dialog. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view as for the following menus example or by using the Create or Modify buttons (chapter 15.3.3 on page 233) in the Cross-Connection Management dialog (see Figure 172. on page 230). The dialog box of Figure 177. on page 241 is presented ( Main Cross Connection view).
To prevent operation faults, the system is designed according to the following guidelines: All operations that may affect traffic must be confirmed. The subsystem provides a confirmation dialog box before the operation can be executed. If the window displays an existing cross-connection, the OK button is insensitive when this cross-connection is assigned to NML or it is not assigned to the user profile. If the window is used to create a new cross-connection, the system verifies that the relevant TPs can be used (not assigned to NML and assigned to the user profile) after the OK button is pressed. If a specified TP is not permitted, the corresponding message box appears.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.4.1 Cross-Connection Parameters The Main Cross Connection view of Figure 177. on page 241 permits to create the cross connections.
A cross-connection is defined through a set of parameters which depend on the connection and protection type. Only those parameters which are permitted within the current context can be accessed. All others are disabled (faded gray). To create a cross-connection, one or more of those parameters must be defined according to the cross-connection type. Table 5. gives an overview about the optional and mandatory input parameters for the various cross-connection types. Activate the relevant entry boxes first of all by clicking on them with the mouse. Configurable Parameters Type Select the connection type: Unidirectional Bidirectional Drop&Continue D&C Topology Select the direction for Drop&Continue: Normal Inverse Protection Define protection state: Protected Not Protected Prot. Criteria (only available for protected connections) Clicking on the Prot. Criteria button, Figure 174. for the Protection Criteria dialog is opened, where the user can display and configure the SNCP Type Protection. No protection criteria for automatic protection switching can be configured. The following SNCP Type are available: SNCPI (Inherently monitored SubNetwork Connection Protection) SNCPN (Nonintrusively monitored SubNetwork Connection Protection) SNCPS (Sublayer SubNetwork Connection Protection) (Not operative in current release)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 174. Protection Criteria Revertive (available only for protected connections) Select whether protection is to be revertive or not. In Revertive mode, a protected service is switched back to its initial, protected element when the fault has been eliminated. When Revertive mode is active, the Wait To Restore protection period prevents several protection switches being initiated as a result of an intermittent failure. The protected element must be error-free during this defined period of time before a protected service is switched back to it. In the current release the Wait To Restore time period is fixed to 5 minutes. In Non-revertive mode, switchover to the protecting element is maintained even after the fault has been eliminated. HOT (available only for protected connections) Not operative in current release To enter the Hold Off Time expressed in msec. HOT is the time between declaration of Signal Degrade or Signal Fail, and the initialization of the protection switching algorithm. Input To enter the input TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog (see Figure 136. on page 180). Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Prot. Input To enter the protecting TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Output It is possible to enter one or more output TPs. To enter one output TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. To enter more than one output TP and create a broadcast connection, proceed as described previously and press button Add afterwards. The previously chosen TP is then moved to the list box located below. Click the Choose button and select the next TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Repeat this procedure for each destination TP. A list of all the selected output TPs is displayed in the list box located below it. To delete a leg from the list, select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
N.B.
Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg.
Table 5. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation
Input Parameters
Unidirectional/Bidirectional Cross Connection Not Protected Protected
Broadcast Cross Connection Not Protected not protected one TP one or more TPs Protected
Type D&C Topology Protection Protection Criteria HOT (not operative) Protected Revertive Input Protecting Input Output
unidirectional/bidirectional normal/inverse not protected one TP one TP protected SNCP-I SNCP-N x x one TP one TP one TP
unidirectional protected SNCP-I SNCP-N x one TP one TP one or more TPs
not available configuration optional
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Non-configurable Parameters CC Topology The topology of the cross-connection is indicated via two icons. The left-hand icon displays the current topology and the right one displays a view of the topology following confirmation of the current modifications. In addition, the color of an icon indicates the connection state of the cross-connection: green > active brown > inactive The icon is set according to the entries made in Type and Protection:
TPs not cross-connected
Unidirectional, not protected
Bidirectional, not protected
Unidirectional, protected
Bidirectional, protected
Broadcast, not protected
Broadcast with one protected leg
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Drop & Continue normal
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Drop & Continue inverse
Loopback connection: unidirectional, same input and output TP Figure 175. Cross-Connection Icons
Example:
current state: TPs are not connected
state after creation: unidirectional, non-protected cross-connection
Figure 176. Creation of a Unidirectional, Non-Protected Cross-Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.4.2 Create a Cross-Connection This chapter lists the steps the user has to take to create a cross-connection using The Main Cross Connection view of Figure 177. on page 241. For a detailed description of the single parameters, refer to the previous para. 15.4.1 on page 235. For information on cross-connection types, refer to para. 15.1.5 on page 222. N.B. After creation of a cross-connection, the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list.
Create a Point-to-Point Cross-Connection (uni- or bidirectional) 1) 2) 3) Select the cross-connection Type. Select the Protection state. Select or type in the Input TP.
To enter the TP, click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog (see Figure 178. ), or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. The Search for Cross Connection Input dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. E.g. to obtain a list of all not connected AU-4 TPs of a rack, first select the rack in the left list box, then select the filter criteria ConnectionState not connected and Class AU-4 and click on button Search. The matching TPs are listed in the right listbox. Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection dialog see para. 14.5.1 on page 179. 4) Select or type in the Output TP as described in Step 3 ).
The following steps only apply to protected cross-connections: 5) 6) 7) 8) Select or type in the Protecting Input (Prot. Input) TP as described in Step 3 ). Configure the Revertive mode. Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. Criteria) The HOT (Hold Off TIme) is not operative in current release
Press the button Ok to confirm the creation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 177. Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
241 / 386
Create a Broadcast Connection 1) 2) 3) Select the cross-connection Type unidirectional Select the Protection state. Select or type in the Input TP. To enter the TP, click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog (see Figure 178. ) or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. This dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. E.g. to obtain a list of all TU12 TPs of a board, first select the board in the left list box, then select the filter criteria Connection State Ignore and Class TU12 and click on button Search TPs. The matching TPs are listed in the right listbox (see Figure 178. ). Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection dialog see para. 14.5.1 on page 179. 4) Select or type in the Output TPs as described in Step 3 )
Press the button Add Leg in the Main Cross Connection dialog and all output TPs are displayed in the list box under the Output field (Figure 179. on page 244). To delete a leg from the list, select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button. The following steps only apply to protected broadcast connections: 5) Select or type in the Protecting input TP. Note that each single protected leg of the broadcast has to be assigned to the same protecting input.
Proceed as described in Step 3 ). Afterwards, select the protected output TP in the output list box and click button Protect Leg. The leg is then marked as protected in the list box. Repeat this procedure for each protected output TP (only one protected leg is supported in current release). To unprotect a leg from the list, select the protected TP in the list box and click on the Unprotect Leg button. Examples are in Figure 179. and Figure 180. 6) 7) 8) Configure the Revertive mode. Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. Criteria) The HOT (Hold Off TIme) is not operative in current release
Press the button Ok to confirm creation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 178. Search for Cross-Connection Output
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
243 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 179. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
244 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 180. Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
245 / 386
15.4.3 Modify a Cross-Connection When modifying a cross-connection, note that some of the transformations involved may affect traffic (because the system may have to destroy and re-create the cross-connection to perform the necessary transformation). As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, the user is required to confirm operations affecting traffic, i.e. a confirmation window warns the user. Within the Main Cross Connection dialog, modification of a cross-connection is restricted to the protection state and the parameters required by the protection. Refer to Table 6. for an overview of the accessible parameter when the protection state has been changed from not protected to protected and vice versa. For a description of the parameters, please refer to the previous para. 15.4.1 on page 235. To modify a cross connection select one from the connection list of Figure 173. on page 232. and then click on the Modify button. N.B. After modification of a cross-connection, the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list.
Table 6. Modifiable Parameters
Input Parameters not protected to protected Type D&C Topology Protection Protection Criteria Unprotected Protected Revertive Input Protecting Input Output
x
Modification protected to not protected normal/ inverse not protected x x x
normal/ inverse protected x x x x x x

not accessible accessible
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The following few facts should be taken into consideration when modifying connections.
Unprotect a protected cross-connection (see Figure 181. ): When a protected cross-connection is being unprotected (protection changed to not protected), the dialog displays the additional option button Unprotected. It offers the choice of whether to keep the protected input TP (Input) or the protecting input TP (Prot. Input) as the only signal source of the new unprotected cross-connection. Ensure that the active TP is selected (i.e. check the protection state in the Cross-Connection Management dialog). An example is in the following Figure 181. In addition, a question box appears, asking the user to confirm the unprotect action.
Figure 181. Unprotect a Bidirectional Cross-Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Protect an unprotected cross-connection: When an unprotected cross-connection is being protected, the Prot. Input button is available to select the protection input connection to insert. An example is in the following Figure 182. Protection principle are given in para. 15.1.6 on page 224.
Figure 182. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections

15.5.1 Activate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release. The Cross Connection Management dialog provides the possibility of displaying a selection of existing cross-connections (see Chapter 15.3 on page 228). The connection state (Act = A or D) is indicated in this connection list. To activate a cross-connection, select one from the connection list (see Figure 173. ) and then click on the Activate button to initiate the process. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change request. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = A). If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated cross-connections, clicking the Activate button only initiates actions on the deactivated cross-connections which were selected. 15.5.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release. After creation, a cross-connection is automatically in an active state. To deactivate a cross-connection, select one from the connection list (see Figure 173. ) and then click on the Deactivate button to initiate the process. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change request. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = D). If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated cross-connections, clicking the Deactivate button only initiates actions on the activated cross-connections which were selected. 15.5.3 Delete a Cross-Connection Only deactivated cross-connections should be deleted. However, deletion of active cross-connections is possible. To delete a cross-connection, select the corresponding connection from the list and click on the Delete button. To prevent operation errors, the user must confirm the deletion request. The deleted cross-connection automatically disappears from the connection list when the operation is successful.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections

15.6.1 Split a Cross-Connection Precondition Only bidirectional cross-connections can be split. Split Select one or more bidirectional cross connections from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press Split. The cross-connections are split without further confirmation from the user. The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. The user has to press Search to see the new cross connections. Depending on the protection state of the original cross-connection, the split action has the following effect: a) Unprotected Cross-Connection An unprotected bidirectional cross-connection is split into two unidirectional cross-connections with the input TP in one of them being the output in the other and vice versa (see Figure 183. ). The new cross connection has the same name and activation status as the old bidirectional one.
Split
Join (case 1)

B B Figure 183. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
b)
Protected Cross-Connection Splitting a protected connection results in one protected unidirectional cross-connection and one broadcast with two legs. The input of the original cross-connection is one of the legs in the broadcast. The other leg in the broadcast is the protecting input. The input of the broadcast is the output of the original protected cross-connection.

A B
Split

A B
Join (case 2)

C C
protected unidirectional crossconnection
broadcast connection

A B
Figure 184. Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.6.2 Join Two Cross-Connections Precondition Two cross-connections can be joined if they match the following characteristics: The connections are either 1) 2) both unprotected, unidirectional and the input is the output of the other one, or one of them is protected and unidirectional, and the other one a broadcast with two legs. Restriction: the input of the broadcast connection has to be the output of the protected connection and the legs of the broadcast match the input and the protection input of the unidirectional connection, also refer to Chapter Split a Cross-Connection, effect b).
Both cross-connections have the same connection state (activated or deactivated). Both cross-connections have the operational state enabled, i.e. they are listed in black color in the Cross Connection Management dialog.
Join Select exactly two cross connections in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press the Join button. The cross-connections are joined without further confirmation from the user. The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. Press Search to see the new cross-connections in the list. The result is either a bidirectional (case 1, see Figure 183. ) or a protected bidirectional (case 2, see Figure 184. ) cross-connection. If the original cross-connections have different names, the new name is a concatenation of the names of both of them.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.7 Protection Switching

The Protection Actions dialog is displayed after clicking on the Protection button in the Cross Connection Management dialog (see Figure 173. ). Users can only switch protection on cross-connections belonging to them and not assigned to the NML. A second condition is that protection is enabled for the cross-connection concerned (protection parameter is set to protected). The three protection actions Force, Lock Out and Manual Switch belong to different levels, whereby Lock has the highest priority and Manual Switch the lowest. Note that a protection state can only be changed within the same or from a higher priority level, e.g. Force To Protecting can be reverted with Release but not with Manual Switch To Input.
Figure 185. Protection Actions Dialog The dialog window enables the user to perform protection- related operations on protected cross-connections. These are: Force to Input (not operative in current release) The cross-connection is switched to the protected input regardless of signal quality. Automatic protection is disabled. Force to Protecting (Input) The cross-connection is switched to the protecting input regardless of signal quality. Automatic protection is disabled.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Release Force Forced switching is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Manual Switch to Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protected input manually. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protected path is worse than on the protecting path.
Manual Switch to Protecting Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protecting input manually. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protecting path is worse than on the protected path.
Release Manual Switch (not operative in current release) A manual switch is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled.
Lock Out to Invoke The connection path is locked for protection switching, i.e. neither forced nor manual switching can be performed.
Release Lock The protection lock is disabled.
N.B.
All the operations listed are context-dependent and are enabled or disabled (grayed) accordingly.
After completion of protection switching, the list entry in the Cross Connection Management dialog is updated automatically. After clicking on an action button and completing the action initiated, the dialog disappears automatically.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.8 Print
This option is used to print the currently filtered cross-connection list and the related filter settings on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format (see Figure 186. and Figure 187. )
Figure 186. Select Printer N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
Figure 187. Select Output Format
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
15.9 Show Cross-Connected TPs

An overview of signal flow can be requested by means of a user action. The user can select a TP and initiate the action Show Cross Connected TPs from the Transmission view.
The result is that all other TPs connected to the currently selected TP are displayed (see the example of Figure 188. on page 257). A line indicates the connection . This functionality should only be applied selectively (either for a single TP or selected group of TPs). Expanding and hiding TPs that are associated with the currently selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are above the TU12CTP) enables all the related TPs to be added to the view so that the complete signal flow can be illustrated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 188. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
257 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
258 / 386
16 OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT 16.1 Introduction

The purpose of this set of dialogs is to handle the operations on the Overhead (OH) bytes of the NE. The possible operations are: Overhead crossconnection Crossconnection between 2 or more OH bytes Termination of an OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel Total Passthrough of the MSOH bytes for some cards Definition of the Phone Parameters
There is a TP associated to every OH byte and to every auxiliary port, so TP could be used instead of OH bytes or auxiliary port, depending on the context.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
16.2 OH Connection overview

Here are described the possible OH connections For OH Phone Parameters directly refer to the para 16.7 on page 268. OH Crossconnection
The operator has to be able to crossconnect 2 or more OH bytes on 2 different boards. The possible crossconnection types are: unprotected bidirectional point to point The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the crossconnection are the following: create the OH TPs involved in the operation create the OH crossconnection: select type of crossconnection select the input OH TP involved in the operation select the output OH TP involved in the operation
After having deleted an OH crossconnection, the involved TPs have to be deleted. OH Termination
The operator has to be able to terminate one OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel. The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the OH bytes termination are the following: create the OH TP involved in the operation create the OH byte termination: select the created OH TP select the auxiliary port/vocal channel TP involved in the operation After having deleted an OH byte termination, the involved TP have to be deleted. Total MSOH Passthrough
For STM ports it make sense to allow the operator to perform a total passthrough of the MSOH bytes. A total msoh passthrough connection (connection between msPassThroughCTP points) is setup only if no single msoh passthrough connection are set and if no single msoh crossconnection are set. If a total msoh passthrough connection is set, a single msoh passthrough connection or a single msoh crossconnection cannot be set. The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the total MSOH passthrough are the following: create the msPassThroughCTP points involved in the operation create the total MSOH passthrough: select the input msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation select the output msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation After having deleted a total MSOH passthrough, the involved msPassThroughCTP points have to be deleted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
16.3 Overhead views

The Overhead Views allows to perform the previously presented operations.
To access select Overhead option from the Configuration pull down menu; the following options are presented in the cascading menu, as shown in the following figure: OH Cross Connection See next para. OH Phone Parameters See para.16.7 on page 268. OH TP creation OH TP deleting See para.16.5 on page 266. See para.16.6 on page 267.
Figure 189. Overhead options The options are described in next paragraphs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
16.4 OH Cross Connection

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Cross Connection option. The Cross-Connection Management for OverHead dialog opens (see Figure 190. on page 262 ) and allows to start the configuration.
Figure 190. Cross Connection Management for OverHead dialog It is similar to the dialog used for the crossconnection of the TP for paths, then the same description and functions are valid. Next configuration steps use the Main Cross-Connection for OverHead (see Figure 191. on page 262) dialog and the TP Search dialog (see Figure 136. on page 180), also in this case already described for path management.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 191. Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog
ED
01
957.140.602 V
For all details, navigation and sequences on these views refer to chapter 15 on page 213. There is one big difference between the OH TPs and the other kinds of TPs: the OH TPs have to be: created ONLY BEFORE a crossconnection/termination operation involving them has been performed. deleted AFTER a crossconnection/termination deleting involving them has been confirmed. The current implementation of the TP Search Dialog (TPSD) works only with created TPs. In the following a description of the main functions and commands is given, also to list the Supported and Not Supported operation. 16.4.1 Cross-Connection Management for OverHead dialog See Figure 190. on page 262 Supported operations Search cross connections/terminations according to one or more of the following filtering attributes: type, TPs . The operator can set the filtering criteria, can start the search and select one or more cross connections/terminations among those presented in a readonly list as a result of the search operation. For each crossconnection/termination matching the filtering criteria, the following information is shown: direction (bidirectional) and the input, output TPs involved;
After choosing one or more cross connections/terminations, this dialog allows to: Delete the selected xconnection/termination
Note: this dialog disappears only when the user explicitly clicks on the close button. Delete operations can be performed on several cross connections/termination at the same time. Modify operations can be performed only on single cross connections/terminations. The OH xconnections are automatically active at the moment of their creation. The operation buttons availability follows some rules: The Delete and Print buttons are enabled only if at least one item is selected from the list. A special dialog will ask the user for a confirmation. the create button is always enabled. It brings up the Main crossconnection Dialog.
When some operation may affect the existing traffic, the operator is warned about that, and a confirmation dialog must be answered to carry on/cancel the operation. The choices for this dialog are: yes/no for single items, yes to all/cancel for multiple items Not Supported operation
When used for OH purposes, the Cross-Connection Management dialog doesnt support the following functionalities:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Protect cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are unprotected Activate/Deactivate cross connections/terminations: all connections/terminations are automatically active since their creation Split cross connection/termination Modify Cross Connection Termination the OH cross
ED
01
957.140.602 V
16.4.1.1 Main Cross-Connection for OverHead dialog See Figure 191. on page 262. According to the philosophy of offering only meaningful operations to the user, and being the OH crossconnection operations a subset of those applying to the general cross connections (e.g:protections are not allowed), some fields of this dialog are disabled. By clicking on the proper portions of the dialog and on the proper buttons, the operator can perform the operations hereafter listed: selection of the crossconnection type selection of the input TP involved in the crossconnection selection of the output TP involved in the crossconnection
In order to do that the operator can either type in the involved TPs ID or use the TP Search dialog. Supported operations When creating a new cross connection, some or all of the following operations are available, depending on the NE type characteristics: Choose one input TP Choose one output TP It is possible to directly type in the TP name or to click on the Choose button to select a TP from the TP Search dialog box
16.4.1.2 TP Search dialog The TP Search dialog (see Figure 136. on page 180) currently offers: navigation rack/subrack/board/port a list of TPs to choose from
When used in the OH domain, this dialog is a subcase of the most generic TP Search. The operator can choose among a list of:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified class: no board selected and MS, RS or VC class selected all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port: board/port selected and no TP class selected all the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port and class: board/port selected and MS, RS or VC class selected all the OH TPs already connected (also accordingly to the connection type) all the OH TPs not yet connected a combination of the above options 01 SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 264 / 386
ED
957.140.602 V
In this Network Element to connect the auxiliary / vocal channels and the Overhead bytes the following operative indication must be observed:
the auxiliary and vocal channels TPs are in the SERVICE board of slot 11 The auxiliary channels are: 2 x G.703 2 Mbit/s; in the screen are indicated as: r01sr1sl11/port#05P Expanding this TP, 31 referred TPs are presented r01sr1sl11/port#06P Expanding this TP, 31 referred TPs are presented
4 x G.703 64Kbit/s; in the screen are indicated as: r01sr1sl11/port#07P r01sr1sl11/port#08P r01sr1sl11/port#09P r01sr1sl11/port#10P
4 x V11; in the screen are indicated as: r01sr1sl11/port#01#01v11TTP r01sr1sl11/port#02#01v11TTP r01sr1sl11/port#03#01v11TTP r01sr1sl11/port#04#01v11TTP
4 x V24; in the screen are indicated as: r01sr1sl11/port#01#01v24TTP r01sr1sl11/port#02#01v24TTP r01sr1sl11/port#03#01v24TTP r01sr1sl11/port#04#01v24TTP
1 x phonic interface (voice channel); in the screen are indicated as: r01sr1sl11/port#01#01q23TTP Expanding this TP, four referred TPs are presented: r01sr1sl11/port#01#001q23TTP r01sr1sl11/port#01#002q23TTP r01sr1sl11/port#01#003q23TTP r01sr1sl11/port#01#004q23TTP These TPs permit to connect the voice channel toward four directions.
The other boards used to terminate or crossconnect the OH bytes are the STMn boards. The OH TP are present in MS, RS and VC4 TP Class. In these TPs the indication ......#0011 to 0099 (MS or RS) are referred to the coordinates of the Section OverHead bytes on the SDH frame (1,1 to 9,9). The voice channel are identified by the ow indication, the FU is for Future Use, the NU is for National Use, UC is for User Channel and Pass is for Passthrough channel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The examples of the figure in this OH connection chapter can be helpful to the operator.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
16.5 OH TP creation
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP creation option. The OH TP creation dialog opens (see Figure 192. ) and allows to create the OH TP to cross connect. In detail, the dialogbox contains the following graphical object: a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be created. The Choose button starts the TP Search (see Figure 193. ) with predefined filtering; the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only not created OH Tps. To visualize the OH TP in the TP Search view double click on the MS, RS or VC4 Tp. OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be created.
Apply button is used to perform a create request of the tp displayed in the OH Tp field. After having performed the create request, the OH Tp field is set to empty. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 192. OH TP creation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 193. OH Search TP for creation
ED
01
957.140.602 V
16.6 OH TP deleting
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP deleting option. The OH TP deleting dialog opens (see Figure 194. ) and allows to delete the OH TP no more involved in an OH crossconnection. In detail, the dialogbox contains the following graphical object: a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be deleted. The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering; the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only created and not crossconnected OH Tps. OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be deleted.
Apply button is used to perform a delete request of the tp displayed in the OH Tp field. After having performed the delete request, the OH Tp field is set to empty. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 194. OH TP deleting
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
16.7 OH Phone Parameters

The OH phone parameters option permits to configure the telephone number and to manage the parameter phonic extension. Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Phone Parameters option. Figure 195. opens.
r01sr1sl11/port#01#01q23TTP
Figure 195. Phone Parameters dialog window In the window are presented: the interface field (at the top) where can be selected the phonic interfaces to be configured. It identifies a TP indicated as q23TTP, referred to the physical voice connection on the SERVICE unit in slot11. the phone number field, to set the telephone number for operator call on the phonic interface. The phonic extension field, where enable or disable the extension of the selected phonic interface. If enabled the phonic signal is extended towards the external on the access panel of the NE. Not operative in current release.
Apply button performs the configuration change of the modified phone parameters of the selected phonic interface without close the dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING 17.1 Introduction

The Performance Monitoring domain on the NE covers the monitoring of counter values for trail termination points and connection termination points. Examples of these counters are Errored Seconds (ES) and Severely Errored Seconds (SES). The Performance Monitoring domain counts these errors during specified granularity periods (15 min, 24h) and stores the values in history data logs. For the purpose of quality supervision, the values of the error counters can be compared to user-defined threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level, a notification (threshold crossing alarm) is issued. The principle performance management functions are: Configuration of the counting interval for each performance measurement point. Collection of the performance data. Configuration of the quality thresholds that generate alarms and log records when predefined values are exceeded.
17.1.1 Overview These functionalities are described in the following chapters in addition to general information concerning performance monitoring on the NE. Chapter Configuration deals with the configuration of performance monitoring Chapter Display Current Data deals with displaying current performance data Chapter Display History Data deals with displaying history performance data Chapter PM Threshold Table Selection deals with the selection of threshold tables Chapter PM Threshold Table Modification/Display deals with the modification of threshold tables and permits to display the same
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
17.1.2 Supported Performance Counters The NE uses performance counters to count transmission errors. A set of performance counters is provided according to the Termination Point (TP), where performance measurement occurs. The user can start performance monitoring on one or more subsets of counters for each TP; it is not possible to start individual performance counters. Near end performance monitoring events are: Background Block Error (BBE): A BBE counter measures the number of errored blocks which do not occur as part of an SES. Errored Second (ES): A one second period with one or more errored blocks or with a defect. Severely Errored Second (SES): A one second period which contains > 30% of errored blocks, or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP). An SES is also counted as an ES. Near End Unavailable Second (NEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second which is part of the Unavailable Time.
The corresponding Far End (FE) performance monitoring events are: Far End Background Block Error (FEBBE): A far end errored block which does not occur as part of an FESES. Far End Errored Second (FEES): Identifies, at a terminal, a one second period with one or more errored blocks or with a defect which were received by the Far End Terminal. Far End Severely Errored Second (FESES): Identifies, at a terminal, a one second period which contains > 30% of errored blocks, or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP) which was received/detected by the Far End Terminal. An FESES is counted as an FEES. Far End Unavailable Second (FEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second which is part of the Unavailable Time at the far end.
The Termination Point (TP) type determines which performance monitoring events can be counted: SDH TPs Both near end and far end counters are supported in receive direction of the signal for all SDH path layers and for the multiplex section layer. For the regenerator section, no far end information is transmitted and, therefore, only near end counting is supported. PDH TPs Only near end counters are supported in receive direction for all PDH path layers. Further definitions:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Errored Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits associated with the block are erroneous. Remote Error Indicator (REI) [formerly Far End Block Error (FEBE)] : Identifies, at a terminal, the count of errored blocks that were received by the far end terminal. Remote Defect Indicator (RDI) [formerly Far End Receive Failure (FERF)]: indicates to a terminal that the far end terminal has detected an incoming failure. 01 SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 80755 BA AA 386 270 / 386
ED
957.140.602 V
Unavailable Time (UAT): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events. Pointer Justification Event (PJE): A PJE is an inversion of I or D bits of the pointer , together with an increment or decrement of the pointer value to signify a frequency justification. Out of Frame Second (OFS) ): An OFS is defined as a second in which one or more out of frame events have occurred. This event is identified by the A1/A2 byte of the SDH Frame. The counting of OFS is only supported for the regenerator section termination. Please note that this counter is deprecated by ETSI and will be removed from international standards.
17.1.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting Far end performance monitoring parameters are derived from Remote Defect Indicators (RDI) and Remote Error Indicators (REI) (refer to Figure 196. ). Node A Source transmission signal significant bits significant bits Node B Sink
RDI insertion Sink near end counter far end counter far end defect near end defect near end defect
far end defect
far end counter near end counter
RDI insertion Source significant bits transmission signal
significant bits
Figure 196. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles At Node A, the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A, while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B. At Node B, the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B, while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Near end performance data at Node A and far end performance data at Node B correspond as long as neither direction is disturbed, and vice versa. In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards, far end errors cannot be counted in the case of near end failures.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
17.1.4 Bidirectional counting (24 h Bi) for QoS As specified in G.826, G.784 and ETSI 300417, the bidirectional PM collection for Quality of Service has been supported by combining the information on each direction of transport to assess a single unavailability state: the bidirectional path is in the unavailable state if either one or both directions are in the unavailable state. PM data are collected by a single UAS plus two sets of three event counters (BBE,ES,SES) for NEPM and FEPM respectively. When the path transports unidirectional payload just the four counters for the NEPM are activated (BBE, ES, SES and UAS). Data collection is performed only on 24 hours registers and the NE maintains a buffer of two registers: the 24hours current registers and the historical one. 17.1.5 End to End (ee 24h) Performance Counting VCn trails can be monitored in intermediate node through the activation of performance monitoring process on Monitoring function. As the trails are often responsible of the endtoend customer service, the end toend monitoring can be requested to provide monitoring for Quality of Service purposes and , in addition, for network Maintenance applications. If SNCP is configured the Quality of Service collection have to be enable in the monitoring functions after the matrix . End to end monitoring is achieved by activation of Performance monitoring on the two direction of path and using farend primitives. This process can be unidirectional (for Monitoring) or bidirectional process (for QoS). In case of unidirectional process one direction can be monitored end to end and both 15minute and 24 h collection can be activated 15min./ 24H FE_BBE, FEES, FESES, FEUAS on incoming or egress signal depending of the POM is enable. The TCA are also evaluated in both 15 minute and 24 H counters. The bidirectional process needs the presence on the two Monitoring functions in the two directions in one NE and among the two monitoring function a 24 hour collection can be activated with the collection of incFE_BBE, incFEES, IncFESES, UAS, eFEBBE, eFEes, eFESES. 17.1.6 Performance Monitoring on AUPJE AU PJE (Administrative unit point justification event) is an optional parameters request in G.784. For AU PJE counters , the positive and negative PJE shall be counted separately on one selectable AU within an STMN signal, after the AU has been resynchronized to the local clock. Refer to G.783. The number of positive and negative outgoing PJE per second are collected in 15 minutes and 24 H counters. A history of 16 x 15minutes counters and 2x 24H are stored in the NE for each AU selected. No Threshold crossing mechanism is supported on AUPJE counters.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
17.1.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) TCM allows monitoring within the operator domain. The quality within the operators own domain can be proven regardless of the received quality of the signal at the entry point of the network. At the input point the reference value is set to zero by using the TCM feature. Tandem Connection Monitoring is applicable to VC4nc (n=1, 4, 16, ...), VC4, VC3 and VC12 layers. TCM provides: Incoming error count (IEC); TC_REI to indicate errored blocks within the TC to the far end; OEI to indicate errored blocks of the egressing VCn; TC_API as access point identifier complying with generic 16byte string format; TC_RDI indicating to the far end that defects have been detected within the TC at the near end TC sink;
17.1.8 Performance Data Collection Near end and far end performance monitoring events are counted over fixed monitoring periods of 15 minutes and 24 hours. The 24-hour monitoring periods start at 00 : 00 (UTC) and the 15-minute monitoring periods start at xx : 00, xx : 15, xx : 30 and xx : 45. Performance monitoring can be enabled and disabled at any time during a monitoring period. An entity of all near end or far end performance monitoring events is always counted, it is not possible to start individual performance counters (e.g. SES only). BBE, ES and SES counting is stopped during Unavailable Time. Event Counting The performance events (e.g. SES) are counted in a counter per event. These counters are called the current registers. At the end of the monitoring period, the contents of the current registers are transferred to the first of the recent registers, together with a time stamp to identify the period (including the day). Time stamping is performed using UTC (as for all alarms). After that, the current register is reset. It is also possible to reset an individual current register manually. Suspect Flag A suspect interval flag is set as an indication that the data of the corresponding register may be either incomplete or invalid. Zero Suppression Zero suppression is a basic mechanism to remove irrelevant PM information and to reduce the amount of PM reports in the system. A PM report is suppressed and hence no history record is created by the entity which is responsible for PM reporting when all of the following conditions are true for the monitoring period: an interval is error-free (all PM counter values are zero) PM was enabled during the entire monitoring interval (the elapsed time equals its nominal value, i.e. 900 for 15 min. and 86400 for 24 h) PM was running properly (the suspect interval flag is not set)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
By default, zero suppression is active for all PM enabled TPs. The number of suppressed intervals is indicated.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
17.1.9 Data Collection N.B. PM data is not counted on boards that were plugged out at the moment of enabling data collection (see PM Configuration dialog). Nevertheless, PM data is counted on boards that were plugged in at the moment of enabling data collection, but were plugged out and back in some time during data collection.
Performance Monitoring can be started at any time. As soon as Performance Monitoring is started on the Craft Terminal, current PM data is collected on the I/O boards, incrementing the performance counters each time an error is detected. The performance data counted is evaluated every quarter of an hour or every 24 hours and stored there in a history record. When the user disables the monitoring of a TP within the first 10 minutes of a 15-minute period, it is possible that have still not been received the PM data of the previous monitoring interval. Since PM data is not stored after monitoring is disabled, the PM data of the previous interval is lost in this case. If equipment or line protection switching occurs during a counting interval, the NE does not provide complete performance measurement for the protected TPs. Only the period between the last switch and the end of the counting window is counted. The interval is marked for suspect data and the elapsed time indicates the length of the measured period. 17.1.10 Performance Monitoring History Performance Monitoring history data is necessary to assess the recent performance of transmission systems. Such information can be used to sectionalize faults and to locate the source of intermittent errors. History data, in the form of performance monitoring event counts, is stored in registers in the NE. All the history registers are time stamped. In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards, the history registers operate as follows: The history data is contained in a stack of registers. There are sixteen 15-minute period registers and one 24-hour period registers per monitored event. These registers are called the recent registers. At the end of each monitoring period, the contents of the current registers are moved to the first of the recent registers. When all recent registers are full, the oldest information is discarded. 17.1.11 Thresholds For quality supervision purposes, the recorded errors through the performance counters can be compared to threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level, a Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) is transmitted to the alarm manager. The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a flag indicating whether crossing this value should be notified by an alarm and logged or only stored in the current problem list. The user can modify and delete such tables. Different thresholds can be assigned for near end and far end and for granularity of 15 minutes and 24 hours.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The TCA only reports the value of the counter which has crossed the threshold, it does not provide a complete set of all counters. Therefore, the user has to explicitly retrieve all current performance data after receiving the alarm. The user can retrieve this information from the Current Performance Management Data Dialog.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Two thresholds mechanism are supported:

For 24hour (implicit clearance) monitoring periods, one threshold value is defined: if the event count reaches or exceeds the threshold value during the monitoring period, a TCA is generated. To clear a TCA, the alarm must be manually acknowledged by the user. For 15minute (explicit clearance) monitoring periods, two threshold values (set, reset) are defined: a TCA is generated during the monitoring period when the event count reaches or exceeds the set threshold value the first time. This TCA is automatically cleared by the system at the end of the following monitoring period in which the event count is less than or equal to the reset threshold value and there was neither an unavailable nor a suspect period during this monitoring period
The following limitations apply for explicit clearance: The value of the low threshold is fixed to 0 (only a single threshold is provided by a threshold table). An SES threshold crossing is cleared at the end of the interval if no unavailability was detected and SES had not reached the low threshold (low threshold equal to 0). Even in case of a suspect interval the TCA is cleared if no unavailability was detected and the low threshold had not been reached.
Additionally an explicit clearance of TCAs for all granularity periods is executed if one of the following events occurs during the current interval: deletion of the current data instance (TP), resetting of counters (only for 24 h), increased thresholds (higher than current value of counters) (only for 24 h).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
17.2 Configuration
Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission menu (see para.14.5 on page 179). Select the TP and open the PM Configuration dialog (see Figure 197. ) by clicking on the menu item Configure Monitoring.
This PM Configuration dialog serves as the main interface to all PM services. Every configuration of all monitoring intervals is defined using this dialog. It is possible to access the same PM Configuration dialog selecting a TP in the Port view and opening the same Performance > Configure Monitoring option in the Port pull down menu (see para.11 on page 117). N.B. To configure PM for au4CTPs and tuxCTPs, Path Overhead Monitoring (POM) ,Supervised Unequipped Termination (SUT, not supported) or Tandem Connection (TCT, TCM) must be created first (see description in para. 14.10 on page 195 ).
The PM Configuration dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected TP, and page labels. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
In case of au4CTP tuxCTPs and VcxCTP, the PM Configuration dialog also contains a cascading menu that allows to configured the POM/SUT/TC options as follow:
PathOverhMon After Matrix PathOverhMon Before Matrix TP (Performance is made on AUPJE ) TCM After Matrix TCM Before Matrix TCT Bidirectional After Matrix TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix
When more than one of the above options is chosen, a Question dialog box is displayed (see Figure 198. ); click on Cancel to continue or OK to interrupt any action. N.B. As long as the PM Configuration dialog is open, a modified POM/SUT/TC configuration is not automatically recognized and displayed. This may lead to rejections or confirmations of forbidden PM configuration. Therefore make sure to reopen the PM Configuration dialog each time the POM/SUT/TC configuration is changed.
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end or far end granularity period (15 min. or 24 h) which together form a dataset. To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label: NE15, near end 15 minutes page NE24, near end 24 hours page FE15, far end 15 minutes page FE24, far end 24 hours page 24hBi , near and far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) ee 24h , end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
Each dataset has to be configured independently. For AU4 CTP and TUx CTP the highest criteria is POM and SUT. I.e. select the POM or SUT option first and then configure the different associated datasets. Confirm the configuration with Apply before you continue with a different POM or SUT option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 197. PM Configuration Dialog (example)
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 198. PM question dialog box (example)
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
278 / 386
Activate any item within the page label by selecting the respective radio button.
Mode Data Collection Select this button to activate performance monitoring. Disabling Data Collection leads to clearance of the current and all history data of this entity. Create History Data If this item is selected, history data collection is performed in the selected entity for the corresponding TP. Note that on disabling this mode item, no history data is available. Nevertheless, datasets collected prior to deactivation are not cleared and are displayed after re-enabling the item, as long as the number of displayed datasets does not exceed 16 for 15 min. granularity and one for 24 hours granularity. Lock Data Collection. Not supported If Lock is selected, PM remains enabled but data collection is stopped. All history performance data remain available. All current values are set to zero.
EML OS Monitoring (only accessible from SH) Not available for Craft Terminal.
Notifications UAT (only available for 24 h granularity) For 24 h granularity, UAT (UnAvailable Time) notifications are created if enabled. This notification results in an UAT alarm in the Alarm Surveillance. N.B. This parameter can only be selected during creation and cannot be subsequently modified.
Suppress Additional Threshold Disabled: the alarm is generated every time the value exceed the upper threshold (value up). Enabled: after a first alarm generation, the alarm is generated again when the value exceed the upper threshold (value up) after the lower threshold (value down) has been exceeded.
Threshold Table Attach a threshold table to the selected TP. Only assign threshold tables that match the granularity period of the datasets (i.e. a 15 min. threshold table must not be assigned to a 24 h dataset). Otherwise the Transmission view is blocked and only released by closing and reopening the PM Configuration window and the Transmission view. Click on button Attach... to open the PM Threshold Table Select dialog (see Figure 201. ) and configure the threshold table (see Chapter 17.5 on page 286). Select button Remove to disassociate the threshold table from the entity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
A threshold table can only be attached if Data Collection is enabled.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Set Alarm Severity UAT ASAP Id This field shows the label of the ASAP pointer assigned to the UAT alarm Set ASAP Allows to set a new ASAP pointer for the UAT alarm. The Set ASAP button opens the window displayed in Figure 13. on page 47.
Confirm the configuration with the button Apply before closing the dialog. Otherwise the configuration is lost.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
17.3 Display Current Data

Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view (see para.14.5 on page 179).
Select the TP and open the Current PM Data dialog (see Figure 199. ) by clicking on the menu item Display Current Data.
This Current PM Data dialog serves to show the results and status of the Performance Monitoring counters. It is possible to access the same Current PM Data dialog selecting a TP in the Port view and opening the same Performance > Display Current Data option in the Port pull down menu (see para.11 on page 117). The Current PM Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected TP, and page labels. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. In case of au4CTP tuxCTPs, VCxCTP the Current PM Data dialog also contains a cascading menu that allows to choose the POM/SUT/TC options to display as follow:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end and far end granularity period (15min. or 24h) which together form a dataset. To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label:
15 min, near end and far end 15 minutes page 24 h, near end and far end 24 hours page 24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) ee 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
All datasets available which are related to the selected TP and recorded in the current monitoring interval are displayed in this dialog. The following items are indicated for each entity: Administrative State Indicates whether the PM collection is locked for the local user or not. Operational State Indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled. Suspect Data Indicates if collection errors occurred during the collection period. Threshold Table Indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity. Current Problem List Indicates current UAT (Unavailable) and TCA (ThresholdCrossed) alarms. N.B. The entry Unavailable ThresholdCrossed indicates, that both alarms are active. Since the text field is too small to display the full text at a time, use the cursor to scroll the text field in this case.
Elapsed Time Indicates the time which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was started. This information tells the user whether the data collection covers the whole period.
At the bottom the PM results are listed. Reset button is used to restart the counting period. Two buttons are present for nearend and farend periods. Press the Refresh button to update the window contents and display the latest data. Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper. N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 199. Current PM Data Dialog (example)
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
283 / 386
17.4 Display History Data

Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view (see para.14.5 on page 179). Select the TP and open the PM History Data dialog (see Figure 200. ) by clicking on the menu item Display History Data.
This PM History Data dialog serves to show stored Performance Monitoring counting. It is possible to access the same PM History Data dialog selecting a TP in the Port view and opening the same Performance > Display History Data option in the Port pull down menu (see para.11 on page 117). The PM History Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected TP, and page labels. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. In case of au4CTP , tuxCTPs VCxCTPs, the PM History Data dialog also contains a cascading menu that allows to choose the POM/SUT/TC options to display as follow:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end and far end granularity period. To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
All available datasets (entities), which are related to the selected TP, are displayed in the table: 15 min, near end and far end 15 minutes page 24 h, near end and far end 24 hours page 24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) ee 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
The PM data is displayed containing information concerning: Interval End Time in the format dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss. The number of recorded events concerning an entity is divided into near end and far end data Elapsed Time indicating whether the data collection was complete (see para. 17.1.9 on page 274) susp indicating suspect data where collection errors occurred during the collection period.
In case of 15 min. entities, a maximum of 16 datasets can be displayed simultaneously for each counter, the 24h entities display a maximum of one dataset. These figures cannot be changed by the user. If the limit of 16 datasets for 15 min. granularity and one datasets for 24 h granularity is reached, the oldest set in the list is cleared when the next data set arrives. Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper. N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 200. PM History Data Dialog (example)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
17.5 PM THRESHOLD TABLE SELECTION

The PM Threshold Table Select dialog (see Figure 201. ) pops up if the Attach button is clicked in the PM Configuration dialog (see Figure 197. ). In addition, this dialog can be accessed using the Configuration menu:
N.B.
Do not open several dialogs at the same time using both possibilities. Since those dialogs are not synchronized, they could display different contents.
The dialog presents a list of existing threshold tables. The tables are individually indicated with a number. Each table is dedicated to a specific entities, as reported in Table 7. Each table can be modified according the operator selections. The filtering criteria are not operative. The user can perform the following actions: Create / Modify / Display a threshold table. Delete an existing threshold table Mark the table in the list and click on the Delete button. Note that a threshold table cannot be deleted if it is attached to a PM entity. An error message informs the user of this situation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Attach the selected threshold table to a TP entity. It is only available entering from the PM Configuration dialog (see Figure 197. )
The user has to close the dialog explicitly by clicking on the button Close.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 201. PM Threshold Table Select
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
287 / 386
Table 7. Threshold table entities association
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
STM16 STM16 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM1 STM16 STM16 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM1 VC4 VC4 VC3 VC3 VC12 VC12
RS RS RS RS RS RS MS Near End / Far End MS Near End / Far End MS Near End / Far End MS Near End / Far End MS Near End / Far End MS Near End / Far End Path Termination Near End / Far End Path Termination Near End / Far End Path Termination Near End / Far End Path Termination Near End / Far End Path Termination Near End / Far End Path Termination Near End / Far End
15 minutes 24 hours 15 minutes 24 hours 15 minutes 24 hours 15 minutes 24 minutes 15 hours 24 hours 15 minutes 24 hours 15 minutes 24 hours 15 minutes 24 hours 15 minutes 24 hours
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
layer
TPs ASSOCIATED
granularity
17.6 PM Threshold Table Create / Modification / Display

17.6.1 Creation The PM Threshold Table Create dialog (see Figure 202. on page 290) pops up when the Create button is clicked in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see Figure 201. on page 287). Carry out the following steps to create a threshold table: 1) Enter the table name in input field Name. Leaving the input field blank or entering only blanks is not allowed and rejected. Select a Granularity of 15 min. or 24 h for the entity. Enter the set (Value Up) and the reset (Value Down) threshold values. Note that the reset value if supported, will be available with 15 min. monitoring periods. Table 8. on page 291 shows the maximum performance monitoring event values. The respective value is automatically reset to the maximum if a larger figure is entered. Select the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed. Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed threshold. Confirm the entries with Apply to create the threshold table. A number of threshold tables can be created from the same window.
2) 3)
4) 5)
6)
Explicitly close the window with button Close.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 202. Create PM Threshold Table
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
290 / 386
17.6.2 Modification The PM Threshold Table Modify dialog (see Figure 203. ) pops up if a threshold table is selected in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see Figure 201. ) and the Modify button is clicked. Carry out the following steps to modify a threshold table: 1) Modify the upper threshold value (Value Up) and the lower value (Value down) Table 8. shows the allowed maximum performance parameter values. 2) 3) Modify the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed. Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed threshold.
Note that the Name (really number) cannot be changed. 4) 5) Confirm the modifications with Apply. To modify more than one threshold table, do not close the dialog, but select the next threshold table in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and press the Modify button (see Figure 201. ).
Explicitly close the dialog with button Close. 17.6.3 Display The PM Threshold Table Display dialog (similar to Figure 203. ) pops up if a threshold table is selected in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see Figure 201. ) and the Display button is clicked. Refer to the previous chapter for a description of the attribute values and types. Table 8. Maximum Performance Parameter Values
Performance Parameter
BBE, FEBBE on STM-16 BBE, FEBBE on STM-4 BBE, FEBBE on STM-1 BBE, FEBBE OFS, ES, UAS, FEES, SES, FESES PJC high, PJC low
Max. Value for 15-min. period

34,559,100 8,639,100 2,159,100 539,100 900 810 1,800,000
Max. Value for 24-h period

3,317,673,600 829,353,600 207,273,600 51,753,600 86,400 78,760 172,800,000
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 203. Modify PM Threshold Table
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
292 / 386
18 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT 18.1 Introduction

All SDH NEs require timing in order to generate the necessary synchronization and frame phase reference information. The timing can be provided by a source external to the NE or an internal timing generator. The derived timing shall be used for all signals and interfaces in the NE that are related to the SDH frame structure. Follows a brief description of the heart of the NE clock known as the Synchronization Equipment Timing Source (SETS). It can be divided into 2 parts: OSC: the internal oscillator. SETG: the Synchronization Equipment Timing Generator.
The SETG is responsible for the generation of the external timing source for the Frame structure and the clock, whilst the internal oscillator is useful only in the abnormal functioning Freerunning mode that will be explained later. The simplified figure that follows represents the internal organization of the SETS.
Selector A
Squelch A Squelch B
Selector C
T4/T5
T1 T2 T3/T6
Selector B OSC
SETG
T0
SETS S15 Y
Figure 204. Internal organization of the SETS. The internal sources (inputs) are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
T1: Reference obtained from incoming STMN signals, T2: Reference obtained from incoming 2 Mbits signals, T3/T6: Reference obtained from an external incoming 2.048 MHz (T3) or 2.048 Mbit/s (T6) signal. OSC: the internal oscillator.
The number of timing reference inputs depends on the configuration of the NE.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The external sources (outputs) are: T0: is the reference output signal for the clock and signal frames, T4: is the reference output for the external equipment synchronization. T5: is the 2 Mbit/s reference output for the external equipment synchronization.
Other reference points: Y: is used for communication of Synchronization Status Message (SSM) between SETS and MST functional blocks. S15: is used to provide notifications and loss of incoming timing reference reporting to the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF).
Selector A provides the capability to select timing reference from available T1 inputs, either automatically based on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources (SSM algorithm), or manual as a result of commands issued from the managing system. Selector B is capable of selecting timing reference from T1, T2, or T3/T6 inputs, according to the SSM algorithm. The capability for manual selection of the timing source is also provided. Selector C is only operated in manual mode, to switch between SETG output signal (T0) and a T1 timing reference. The squelch functions A and B mute the relevant timing references in the presence of failure condition, or SSM threshold violation. The choice of the timing reference is done in two ways: Automatically: Following a particular algorithm based on the quality and the priority of the incoming timing signals. The automatic selection is based either on the priority of the incoming timing source (Priority algorithm) or on the priority and the quality level of the incoming sources (SSM algorithm). Manually: Following an order from the Operator. N.B. The priority level is determined by the Operator for each candidate timing source. It is static information. On the other hand, the quality of the source is dynamic information, dependant of the quality of the reference clock generating the timing. In an SDH signal frame, the quality of the timing source is located in the Section Overhead.
The SETG has 3 modes of operation: Locked mode: The SETG output is fully controlled by the external timing references (T1, T2 and T3/T6). HoldOver mode: The external timing reference is malfunctioning. The SETG during normal functioning stores regularly the value of the external timing reference. In this case the SETG output is controlled by this memorized value. Free running mode: This is not a normal operating mode. The external timing reference and the memorized timing reference are malfunctioning. In this case the SETG output is controlled by the internal clock source.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2 Synchronization Management

The operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are the following:
Timing Source Configuration, Protection Commands, T0 Configuration, T4 Configuration, SSU Configuration, Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration, Frame Mode Configuration (see para. 14.7 on page 191) Remove Timing Reference, Change T4<> T5 Set T0 Equal T4, Change 2 MHz > 2 Mbit (available only if T3 has been configured as timing source) Remove T0 Equal T4, Show Timing Source.
Before any other operation the synchronization view has to be displayed. 18.2.1 Displaying the Synchronization View The synchronization view can be normally opened using the menu Views options (see Figure 205. ). Using menu options, select the Synchronization option from the Views pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 205. Obtaining the synchronization view. Selecting this menu option the synchronization representation will be displayed directly into the current window instead of the current view. All the operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are performed from this synchronization view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.2 Synchronization View The Synchronization view shows the external timing reference sources and the T0, T4 or T5, generation. The selection is based on the SSM algorithm or on the priority of the incoming timing sources. Activating the SSM algorithm implies that the selection of the source is before done on the quality criteria and then on the priority criteria for sources at the same quality level. After selecting the Synchronization option from the Views menu the Synchronization View is visualized in Figure 206.
Figure 206. Synchronization View Example
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Synchronization View Description The synchronization view provides two list of allowable timing references:
one for T0 timing output; T0 list is always present; one for T4 or T5 timing output; the presence of the T4/T5 list is configurable using resource files. T0 list contains : a timing reference associated to the Internal Oscillator timing source; it is always present and it cannot be removed or redefined. 6 max timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1, T2 or T3/T6 configurable by the operator.
T4 list contains : 6 timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1 configurable by the operator.
The T0 and T4/T5 lists are used for the management of reference timing source protection; a 1:n protection like mechanism is used for the selection of the timing source from T0 (T4/T5) list of the allowable timing references, . The protection system chooses the timing reference to generate the output T0 (T4/T5) either automatically, basing on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources according a selection algorithm or manually under control of the managing system. View elements description Here after, the basic component contained in the synchronization view are described: Timing reference Each allowable timing reference, , is represented by the graphical object displayed in the view; the timing reference graphical object displays (with the exception of Internal Oscillator timing reference) the following information (if the timing source has been declared by the user): the name of the selected timing source the status of the synchronization source: (lockout, manual switch, force switch, automatic switch, no request, failure) the label of the quality level of the timing input source the priority of the timing input source 2 small boxes representing the SSF (Los) and DRIFT alarms detected on the timing source; DRIFT means that the Frequency Offset between the external signal source and the internal clock is high then the maximum tolerance value. SSF means that the Server Signal Failure is sending a wrong reference signal to the NE. In case of alarm indication the operator can select Show Timing Source ( Figure 223. ) to visualize the alarm detail.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
In the timing reference graphical object associated to the Internal Oscillator the following information are displayed :
the name of the timing source: Internal Oscillator a small box representing the LOS alarm; the small box will be lighted up when all the selected timing source are lost, indicating the Holdover or Free Running operation mode; a label field representing the abnormal clock operation modes; one of the following strings can be displayed in the label field: Holdover, displayed when the clock operates in Holdover mode; Free Running, displayed when the clock operates in Free Running mode empty string is displayed when the clock operates in Lock a label 0 representing the priority of the Internal Oscillator
Selectors small ellipse are used to represent respectively: the selector A; the selector B; the selector C; Squelch Status boxes contained a label field are used to represent the squelch statuses T0/T4 and T4. The box dis plays the configured quality level threshold and it is lighted up when the output timing signal is inhibited. Output Signal an arrow and a label field are used to represent respectively: the output signal T0; the output signal T4/T5; line Type the following different line type are used to link the output signals and the respective allowable timing reference: A solid line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing reference is currently used to generate that signal; A dashed line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing reference is not currently in use as timing source but will act in the protecting role. In the same way, a solid line between T0 signal and T4/T5 signal (or T0_Test signal) box is drawn when T0 signal is used to generate T4/T5.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.3 Timing Source Configuration This functionality allows to configure the input synchronization sources and configure or modify the timing source priority and quality.
Figure 207. Synchronization Menu The menu options are greyed according to the current state of the dialogue box that the user can open. Firstly select a synchronization source reference and after the Synchronization menu to open the Synchronization Option List ( Figure 207. ). Then select the Timing Source Configuration option from the cascading menu, as shown in the above figure. The following dialogue box is opened.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 208. Timing source configuration for crossconnect equipments The Timing source configuration dialogue box displays the extracted quality of the selected timing source. It permits to configure the following timing source information: Quality level, Priority level
Select an empty synch. source reference and click on Timing Source Configuration and then on the Input Source Choice. Figure 209. shows the opened windows. Following the TP Search procedure described in para.14.5.1 on page 179 ( rack, subrack, board, port ) enter the physical board termination point (TP) value; these TP are : EIS for electrical SDH port, OpS for optical SDH port. This operation can be repeated for all the available empty synch. sources both for T0 clock and for T4 clock.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 209. Synch. source configuration for ADM equipment Click on the Input Quality Configuration: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired quality level. Timing source may have, in increasing order, five quality levels : G.811, G.812T, G.812L, G.813, Q. Dont use (where the highest quality level is G.811 ). If Input Quality Configuration is set to a value other than Extracted, Rx quality is forced to this value. Click on the Priority: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired priority level. The internal oscillator timing source will have the lowest priority (priority=0) and its priority can not be changed. The other timing sources will have a priority of 1 to n. Priority of 1 is the highest priority. Levels 6,...2 are intermediate levels between level 0 and 1, in increasing order of priority (i.e. 0 6 5 4 3 2 1). When the configuration of the timing source is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. Positioning the mouse on the synch. source box Port# test, the corresponding physical interface denomination (racksubrackboardport) is written on the window bottom left.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.4 Synchronization Protection Commands Select the timing reference from the synchronization view. As in Figure 207. , select the Synchronization pull down menu. You can then select the Protection Commands to open the Figure 210. Menu options are greyed according to the current state of the selected timing source.
Figure 210. Lockout, Force and Manual commands a) Invoke/Release Lockout: Locking or unlocking a timing source enables or disables the timing source from being considered as a possible timing source for T0 or T4/T5. Invoke/Release Force and Manual Selection of Timing Source
b)
General selection A timing source can be selected manually or automatically. Furthermore, the selection of a particular incoming timing source (except the internal oscillator) may be forced. This selection is independent of the priority or quality of the timing source. If the timing source is lockout or unavailable, this operation is impossible. A timing source is considered to be available if it is not lockout and has not a failure condition or Priority level of 0. The forced switch mode is terminated by releasing or inhibiting the force selected timing source. The manual selection option is only possible if the quality and priority of the selected timing source are sufficient. Otherwise the automatic selection algorithm overrules the manual selection. If the previously manual selected timing source becomes unavailable the automatic selection is activated. The Status indication describes the current synch. status (No Request, Automatic Switch, Failure, ...) N.B. The internal oscillator cannot be forced or manually selected. From the dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the operation. To perform or release a T0 or T4/T5 lockout, forced or manual selection, the following operations have to be done: Select the T0 or T4/T5 source. Click on the Synchronization menu. Select the Protection Commands option then invoke/Release the Lockout, Forced or manual Selection option. Click on Apply in the displayed confirmation box. Manual selection is not operative in the current release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria Select the available T0 or T4 synchronization sources and then the T0 or T4 Configuration... command. This command permits to select/deselect the SSM algorithm, to set the wait time to restore and to enable the revertive procedure if all these features are available. In this NE revertive mode is hardware set, with fixed WTR. In Revertive mode the internal selector A/B (Figure 204. ) changes every time to the best reference clock with the highest quality; on the same quality level basis the reference clock Source with the best priority will be selected. The changing mechanism of the reference inputs is controlled by the wait time to restore: this time sets a delay before to change the input source. Selecting the T0 or T4 Configuration set the SSM algorithm and the Wait To Restore Time in the dialog box upper part of Figure 211. Click on the SSM Algorithm to select/deselect it. Wait To Restore Time button and Revertive option button are disabled Selecting T4 Configuration it is possible to set the T4 squelch criteria in the bottom dialog box of Figure 211. This functionality allows to configure the external timing reference (T4) squelch criteria. The squelch function mutes the relevant timing references in the presence of a failure condition. Squelch may be forced by the Operator or according to squelch criteria which consists in a choice of quality level. Different squelch criteria may be applied: when T0 is selected to generate T4 (squelch B Figure 204. ): T0 may be squelched if all the allowable timing references of Selector B have Quality Level lower than the programmable threshold. when T1 is selected to generate T4 (squelch A Figure 204. ) :T1 may be squelched if T1 Quality Level is lower than the programmable threshold or if it becomes unavailable. The T0/T4 and T1/T4 squelch fields enables you to configure the quality level of the T0 or T4 timing source, opening the relevant option menu. When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed, click on the OK button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The T5 output field allows to select the bit used (from #4 to #8) for SSM. The Cancel button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 211. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria The T4 squelch configuration dialogue box enables you to configure the quality level of the T4 timing source. Click on the T0: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level. Click on the T4: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level. The T4 Force Squelch enables you to activate the T4 forced squelch. When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.6 SSU Configuration The SSU configuration command allows either to configure the single NE or the NE with SSU. In the last case the SSU quality has to be defined. Selecting SSU Configuration from the Synchronization menu is presented Figure 212.
Figure 212. SSU Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.7 Remove Timing Reference Select the synch. source to remove and click on the Remove Timing Reference option (Figure 213. ). To remove the selected source click on OK button of the confirmation message (Figure 214. ).
Figure 213. Synchronization source removing To remove the selected source click on OK button of the confirmation message (Figure 214. ).
Figure 214. Synchronization source removing confirmation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.8 Change T4 <> T5 This menu allows the change of the synchronization physical interface from 2Mhz (T4 ) to 2 Mbit/s (T5) and viceversa. This menu is enable only if the SERGI board is present in the subrack. Select Change T4 <> T5 from the Synchronization menu as shown in Figure 212.
Figure 215. Change T4 <> T5 menu A confirmation message appears (see Figure 216. on page 307)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 216. Change T4 <> T5 confirmation message Click on ok to confirm; the new window display T5 instead of T4 (see Figure 217. on page 308)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 217. Change T4 <> T5: command execution
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
308 / 386
18.2.9 Change 2MHz >2Mbit This menu is enabled only if the operator selects a protection unit which have as source a 2 MHz (T3) or a 2 Mbit/s (T6) without traffic. Select Change 2MHz >2Mbit from the Synchronization menu as shown in Figure 218.
Figure 218. Change 2MHz >2Mbit menu A confirmation message appears (see Figure 219. on page 309)
Figure 219. Change 2MHz >2Mbit confirmation message Click on ok to confirm;

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The label of the protection unit will be changed depending on the kind of source selected (see Figure 220. on page 310):
If the selected protection unit is a 2 MHz, then the label will be changed into 2Mbit/s (2 Mbps T6#A in the example of Figure 220. ) If the selected protection unit is a 2 Mbit/s, then the label will be changed into 2MHz (2MHz T3#A for example)
Figure 220. Change 2MHz >2Mbit: command execution
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.10 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4 To connect T0 internal synch. select a synch. source and click on Set T0 Equal T4 menu option. The connection between T0/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line as in the example of Figure 221.
Figure 221. T4 equal T0 setting To separate T4 from T0 click on the Remove T0 Equal T4 menu option. The T0/T4 connection will become shaped while the connection between T1/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.11 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration Select the T1 SDH Reference Source in the Synchronization View (Figure 206. ) hence the Transmission SSM Quality Configuration is enabled. This selection allows, with the Inserted option, to transmit the system internal T0 clock quality towards the external SDH interface. It is also possible to transmit different quality level selecting a different value. Click on Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration of the Figure 222. opens. Synchronization menu option.
Figure 222. Transmission SSM Quality This Transmission SSM Quality window can be also opened from any SDH boards. Select the Equipment option of the View menu, then access the Board view> Port view> Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration; it is also possible to open the window selecting the Transmission option of the View menu, then access the Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration option. In both cases select the MST block
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
18.2.12 Show Timing Source Selecting any T1 or T2 Reference Source in the Synchronization View (Figure 206. ) hence the Show Timing Source is enabled. This selection allows to analyze the input source considering its payload structure and the related alarms (Port view is presented) . Click on Show Timing Source of the Synchronization menu option. Figure 223. opens.
Figure 223. Show Timing Source (example with T2 reference source)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
314 / 386
19 MSSPRING MANAGEMENT 19.1 MSSPRING introduction

Different MSSPRING protections architectures are provide: 2Fiber (Terrestrial), and 4Fiber NPE (Transoceanic). See ITUT Rec. G.841. The description of the MSSPRING protections is inserted in the Technical Handbook. 4 Fiber MSSPRING is not operative in this release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.2 MSSPRING connection configuration advices

In the following paragraphs 2Fiber advices are reported, to follow before to implement the MSSPRing protection: there are some limitations concerning the aggregate types or the AU4s crossconnections to be considered. 19.2.1 2Fiber MSSPRING connection configuration advices The following suggestions must be considered in the MS SPRING connection configuration: SNCP, 4 Fiber MS SPRING and MSP protection connections cannot be installed in a 2 Fiber MSSPRING network. This leads to an unprotected connections installation. AU4s from #9 to #16 dont have to be used for connections nor considered in any parameter of Squelching table provisioning. Only AU4s from #1 to #8 must be used and configured for path installation. AU4 permutation (change of AU4 allocation) is not allowed. The AU4 allocated to passthrough in HVC connections must be the same through the node. AU4 crossconnection line side, i.e. paths received from the line and loopedback to the same line are not allowed. Follow the Squelching Table Configuration in order to define the Squelching Table HO for East and for West Side describing, for each connection installed, as Source Node, the Node Identifier of the node generating the considered AU4 and as Destination Node, the Node Identifier of the node terminating the AU4.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.3 Operative sequence to configure MSSPRING

19.3.1 Operative sequence to configure 2Fiber MSSPRING Next paragraphs list the operative sequence according the type of procedure to obtain. a) Activation procedure Create an MSSPRING schema with WTR, Node Identifier, Ring map and the related Squelching Table for each node of the ring, in the desired order. WTR Ring must be the same in all the nodes. In the Main dialog for MSSPRing management select ACTIVATE in each node of the ring, in the desired order. Consider that, in this step, Default K byte West or East detection by View Protection Status Parameter (under MSSPRing label > Protocol exception), will occur on those Ports connected to the nodes not provisioned yet with the MSSPRing protection created (active). Verify in the View Protection Status Parameter screen, at the end of the provisioning update, that all the nodes of the ring are in MSSPRing active and No request state. Deactivation procedure In the Main dialog for MSSPRing management select DEACTIVATE in each node of the ring. Consider that, in this step, Default K byte West or East detection by View Protection Status Parameter (under MSSPRing label > Protocol exception), will occur on those Ports of the activated nodes connected to the nodes just deactivated. In the Main dialog for MSSPRing management select DELETE in each node of the ring. Removing a node In the Manage ring Map view select the node and click on theRemove Node button. Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map. Opening the View Protection Status Parameter screen, send Force Ring command to both NEs adjacent to the node to be removed. Physically remove the node. Connect the fibers and send the Release command of the relevant Force Ring to both NEs adjacent to the removed node. Adding a node In the Manage ring Map view insert the node in the selected position. Next nodes are automatically shifted. Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map. Opening the View Protection Status Parameter screen, send Force Ring command to both NEs adjacent to the node to be added. Physically add the node and configure with 2Fiber MSSPRING activated with the right configuration (Ring Map, Squelching table, WTR, Node Identifier). Connect the fibers and send the Release command of the relevant Force Ringto both NEs adjacent to the added node.
b)
c)
a)
b) a) b) c)
d) e)
a) b) c) d)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
e)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.4 MSSPRING Management

In the current release the NE supports the MSSPRING protection as Terrestrial architecture. The Transoceanic application with 4Fiber is not supported in current release. For the 2Fiber Terrestrial application a max. of 16 nodes are available. The available tables permit to visualize for the same NE the architecture 2 x 2Fiber. Figure 224. shows the MSSPRing pull down menu.
Figure 224. Display MSSPRing pull down menu The first Main Dialog for MSSPRing management option contains all the commands to configure and manage the MSSPRing. In any dialog box is present the Cancel or Close buttons. When the user clicks on these buttons the dialog box will close without starting any operation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.4.1 MSSPRing Main Configuration Select the MSSPRing pull down menu. Then select the Main Dialog for MSSPRing management option from the pull down menu. The following dialogue box is displayed (Figure 225. ) when no protection have been previously configured.
Figure 225. MSSPRing Management dialogue box. The only command available is Create. The name of Schema Selection is not editable but is fixed to No Schema. Click on Create to start the MSSPRing configuration. Figure 226. opens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 226. Creation Schema dialog box. The user can select the MSSPRing Application and the Architecture types supported by the Network Element. Terrestrial MSSPRing Application is a 2 Fiber architecture. Transoceanic MS_SPRING is a 4 Fiber architecture (not supported in current release) The Port Selection depends on the Architecture type: if the architecture is a 2F MSSPRing, the working and protection port on each side is the same and the Protecting West and East fields are disabled (greyed). If the architecture is a 4F MSSPRing, the working and protection ports on each side are different. The label r(xx)sr(y)sl(zz)port#(hh) where r=rack, sr=subrack, sl=slot give the position of the physical port. In the same board it is generally possible to have different port numbers. The OK button will start the selected operation. The cursor is displayed busy up to receiving a reply. Then the dialog window will be closed. Figure 227. opens and all commands are now available. The Holdoff Time command is not operative in current release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 227. Activated MSSPRing Management
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Click on Ring Map to configure the network node connection. Figure 228. opens.
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
321 / 386
Figure 228. Node Id and associated ring node position. The Ring Map sets the connection sequence of the nodes within the ring. The matrix represents up to 64 nodes for transoceanic application and up to 16 nodes for terrestrial application. Select Current NodeId (it means the NE where the operator is acting) in the box and enable ( n ) Change NodeId button (Id means Node Identifier). Select Available NodeId in the pull down list (0 to 63 for transoceanic application, 0 to 15 for terrestrial application) releasing the left mouse button or pushing the stepper arrows and enter keys to select the NodeId value. This will be displayed in the Available NodeId box then click on Add Node button. Clicking on the Add Node button the selected Ring position will shift one step on the right starting from 1 position and in the NodeId field the Available NodeId value is inserted. In the same time the Available NodeId will be updated to a new value. The default association for a four node ring related to the fourth node (NodeId=3; Ring Position=4) is depicted in Figure 229.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 229. Ring map configuration Repeat the procedure for all nodes of the ring selecting the different NEs and edit the different Current NodeId value. To remove a node, select the node and click on Remove Node button. The following Ring Position of the nodes on the right decreases by one and the erased NodeId is inserted into Available NodeId , so it can be assigned to other nodes. The OK button will start the selected operation, displaying the busy cursor up to receiving the reply to the actions. Then the dialog window will be closed. Click on the WTR button. Figure 230. opens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 230. WTR dialog box. Click on the push mouse button on the up/down Seconds arrows to select the required delay for the relevant WTR. The step value is 60 sec. The range value accepted is from 60 sec. to 900 sec. (in current release is fixed to 300 sec.) Click on OK to apply the WTR Configuration. The same WTR Time Ring must be set on each Node of the ring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.4.2 Squelching Table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications With a 2 fiber Terrestrial application can be selected the Squelching Table while with a 4 fiber Transoceanic application (not supported in current release) can be selected the Ring Traffic (see Figure 227. on page 321). If the operator tries to select a different table a error message is visualized. Figure 231. shows the error message visualized when is selected the Ring Traffic with a Terrestrial application.
Figure 231. Example of error message Click on Squelching Table of see Figure 227. on page 321 to configure the AU4 (AU4#1 to AU4#8 for 2F Architecture,) connection between the different nodes. Figure 232. opens. The same opens clicking on Configure Squelch Table of the MSSPRing pull down menu of Figure 224. on page 318.
Figure 232. Squelching table

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the window is opened for the first time the squelching table is N/A ( not available ) because the NE has never been configured. Point the mouse on the matrix position and click on the right mouse button to open the node list menu. Select the node identification number (0 to 15) from the available list using the slider or the stepper arrows on the right scroll region.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.4.2.1 Squelching table example Figure 233. is an example of ring traffic. Figure 234. represent in a table the connections of the ring example. Figure 235. to Figure 242. show how to configure the relative squelching table. AU4#3 West A East AU4#1 West East B
AU4#2
AU4#1 AU4#2 AU4#3 AU4#2 AU4#3 AU4#3
D East West East AU4#1
C West
Figure 233. Example of a ring traffic The squelching table is applicable only for HOVC signals.
AU Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
west
A
VC
Node
B
east
C D A
VC VC
Figure 234. Connections of the ring of Figure 233.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Node A: 1660SM MSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 235. Squelching table of Node A, West side.
Node A: 1660SM MSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 236. Squelching table of Node A, East side.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Node B:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 237. Squelching table of Node B, West side.
Node B:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 238. Squelching table of Node B, East side.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Node C:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 239. Squelching table of Node C, West side.
Node C:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 240. Squelching table of Node C, East side.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Node D:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
Figure 241. Squelching table of Node D, West side.
Node D:1660SMMSSPRINGSquelch Table Configu...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 242. Squelching table of Node D, East side.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.4.3 Activate, Deactivate and Delete commands The Main Activities commands ( Figure 227. on page 321) manage the MSSPRing configuration. The MSSPRing status can be Enable, Active, Disable and Inactive. After having configured the protection schema by means of the Create button, the status becomes Enable . The Activate button selection enables the MSSPRing protection mechanism on the selected schema configuration. To change from Active to Enable click on the Deactivate button. This command starts the request to deactivate the MSSPRing protection mechanism. When the selected protection schema is Enable the Delete button starts the request to remove it. The delete action is started after confirming the window message Figure 243. .
Figure 243. Confirmation message During the activation procedure on different ADMs some of these can be in Active status , others in Inactive status. The statuses, the protocol request and the protocol protection errors are described in the chapters describing theMSSPRing Protection Status and Commands .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.5 MSSPRING Protection Status and Commands for 2 fiber terrestrial application
19.5.1 2F MSSPRing protection commands If a protection schema is Active it is possible to select one of the above commands. Clicking on the Prot. Commands button in the MSSPRing >Main Dialog for MSSPRing management ( see Figure 227. on page 321), Figure 244. is opened. 8
Figure 244. Protection states and commands Idle status (2F) The working/protection architecture. span state boxes are not available (greyed) for the 2Fiber MSSPRing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
In the MSPRing 2 Fiber configuration, the 18 working channels are inserted into the 916 protection channels in the opposite side of the failure event as shown in Figure 245.
w/p
A
w/p
w/p
B
w/p
Ring Protection: the working channels (AU4 1 to 8) are substituted by the ring protection channels p (AU4 9 to 16) ( B on East side ) ( A on West side )
Figure 245. Ring Protection (2F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.5.2 External commands (2F) The external protection commands are : Lockout, Force, Exercise (not operative in current release),Manual, WTR. The lockout commands disable the MSSPRing management. The lockout section presents six lockout commands, four operative ( Figure 246. ). Each lockout command is applicable on different points where the lockout actions has to be performed ( Figure 247. ) and any Lockout command is associated to a Release command to come back to the previous status. Term Span identifies the section interested by the command, it doesnt assume the Span meaning of the four fiber protection.
Figure 246. Lockout commands (2F)
West w p p w
East w p p w
w= working (AU4 1 to 8) p=protection (AU4 9 to 16)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 247. Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
The protection events can be equipment/signal failure, signal degrade or external command or a combination of them.
The Events will be served if some actions (B/S=bridges and switches) are executed and the network has been updated. The Events will be signalled if the K1/K2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened, without execute actions. A single ring failure is completely restored but not two ring failures. When are present multiple ring failures the automatic B/S protection will try to maintain on all the possible connections. The K1/K2 communication protocol MSSPRing is generated from the two nodes adjacent to Event via the protection communication channels. A node is defined tail end when it firstly receives the Event, the second node is defined headend when it receives back the protocol answer. Figure 248. shows the association of tailend / tailend or headend / tailend. Some network protection mechanisms are accepted or rejected depending on the end type (tail/head) (lockout command,...)
E w/p
E w/p
X
w/p
X
w/p
Tailend
Tailend/Headend
Tailend
Figure 248. Tailend / Headend association If the node is tailend, the lockout working ring command disable the protection MSSPRing mechanisms, while if the node is headend, it serves the request node protection (protection not disable). See Figure 249. on page 336. With the lockout protecting span command and a ring failure, the ring protection is served if this ring failure occurred along the same section; the ring protection is disabled if the ring failure has occurred in another ring section. On the contrary, with the lockout working ring command failure and a ring failure along a different section, the ring protection is served ((protection not disable). See Figure 250.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Lockout working
w/p head E W failure W
w/p
B
E tail
ring protection Lockout working

w/p
failure
w/p
A
W
tail E
B
head E
no ring protection
Figure 249. Tailend / headend protection with a lockout working and a one direction ring failure (2F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Lockout protecting Span w/p failure failure
Lockout protecting Span w/p w/p
A
W E
w/p W E
A
E
B
E ring protection W
C
no ring protection
Lockout working
Lockout working
Lockout working
w/p
failure
w/p
failure
A
W E
w/p W W
A
E
w/p W
B
E ring protection E
B
no ring protection
Lockout working
failure w/p w/p E W
A
E
C
W ring protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 250. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Lockout Working Ring W A Node A Node A Node A Node Ring E Ring W Ring E Lockout Working Lockout Protection Lockout Protection 1 ring protection on the opposite side if the ring failure occurs between AC or CB nodes 2 ring protection on the opposite side if the ring failure occurs between AB or BC nodes W w/p W W w/p E 3 E 2 E
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Combinations of nonserved failures and external commands
B
w/p 1
A
w/p 4
Figure 251. shows a ring with three nodes and the actions performed by the lockout commands. This command disables the acknowledgment of the signal failure/degrade on the receiving ports.
Figure 251. Lockout command and nonserved failures (2F)
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
338 / 386
The Force command ( Figure 252. ) executes a forced protection. The Force Ring command substitutes the working channels (AU4 1 to 8) with the opposite direction protection channels (AU4 9 to 16) between two adjacent nodes (Figure 253. ). The Force Span command is not operative in 2 fiber MSSPring.
Figure 252. Forced and Manual commands (2F)
Manual/force Ring East
Manual/force Ring West
A
W
w18 p916 w18 p916
A1
E W/P
w18 p916 w18 p916 w18 p916
B1
W W/P
B
E
w18 p916 w18 p916
W/P
w18 p916
W. 18 channels are substituted by P. 916 channels on the opposite side for both adjacent nodes
Figure 253. Manual and Force Ring command (2F) The Manual command is similar to Force command but it is at a lower priority level with respect to automatic MSSPRing. The general priority scale that can be applied to solve antithetical situations starting from the lowest priority level is: manual ring automatic working ring force ring lockout Working Ring lockout Protecting Span. When a force ring command is applied a next working failure is not able to modify the forced configuration applied. That is because force ring command has a higher priority respect to the Automatic working protection. In this condition the ring can be split according the location of command and event. Vice versa the Manual protection is exceeded by the Automatic protection. Figure 254. visualizes the ring protection with a Force/Manual command and a signal failure. FSR is for Force Switching Request, SFR is for Signal Failure Request.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Force Ring East failure

w/p
A
W E E
w/p W
C
W E ring protection for FSR Force Ring East failure w/p w/p W E
A node is isolated
A
E W
C
E W
B
Manual Ring East ring protection for SFR and FSR w/p failure
A
W E E
w/p
C
W E
ring protection for SFR Manual Ring East failure w/p w/p W E
A
E
C
W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ring protection for SFR
Figure 254. Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Signal fail/degrade Signal fail/degrade Ring W Ring E

A node
12 w. channels are sobstituted by 34 p. channels
A node
34 w. channels are sobstituted by 12 p. channels
B/S actions
w/p
W 1
E 4
w/p
B
w/p 2
A
3 w/p
Figure 255. Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F) Each command starts when the proper button is selected. A dialog box ( Figure 256. ) has to be confirmed before the command is performed. From each command exists its own Release button to cancel the previously selected command and come back to normal MSSPRing protection.
Figure 256. Example of confirmation dialog box Clicking on the WTR command (of Figure 227. on page 321) next figure opens. If the WTR box, in the Local Condition field of Figure 244. on page 332, becomes red a waiting time has been activated after repairing the ring failure. The waiting time, set in the configuration menu, can be cleared selecting the Clear WTR Ring command. A confirmation dialog box opens and, if the operator clicks OK, the WTR box turns off and the protection status window is updated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 257. Clear WTR command (2F)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.5.3 2F MSSPRing dual protection commands In general dual contemporary Events can be: two external commands an external command and a ring failure two contemporary ring failures Dual Events can appear on the same side W/W (West/West) or E/E (East/East) (SS= same side) or on the opposite side W/E or E/W (OS= opposite site) of the ring network. In the SS or OS the Events can appear on the same node (SN) or on the different nodes (DN), the different node can be an adjacent node (AN) or a remote node (RN). Figure 258. depicts a clockwise ring network . The network propagation K1K2 protocol signals are according to the following legend : C R B Cs Rs Bs = served the column element = served the row element = served both row and column elements = signalled (not served) the column element = signalled (not served) the row element = signalled (not served) both row and column element when a command (Manual switch, Force switch) is neither served nor signalled, it is erased ( it is not pending at the node)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Reference point
clockwise
OS SN 1
SS SN
E W
SS RN 4
OS AN 2
OS RN
W w/p
W w/p
SS AN
3
w/p w/p
SS RN
OS RN
Figure 258. Ring network reference scheme (2F) Figure 258. visualizes the ring reference scheme: the adjacent node (AN) is the node connected to the reference point. The automatic protection for dual ring failures is represented in Figure 260. Consider the network reference scheme of Figure 259. with a tailend / headend alarm propagation. In this figure are depicted the node switches for any reported double events.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
failure
w/p
1
W E E
w/p W
4
W E W E
2 3
SSAN failure failure

w/p
1
W E E
w/p W
4
W E W E
2 3 failure
SSRN
failure
w/p
1 failure
E W E
w/p W
4
W E W E
2 3
OSSN
failure
w/p
1
W E E
w/p
failure
W
4
W E W E
2 3
OSAN
failure
w/p
1
E W E E W
w/p W
4
W
2
E
OSRN
3 failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 259. Examples of Double ring failure
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Reference point
Automatic Protection Ring All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Other points
SN
Automatic Protection Ring
SS
AN
Node 2 : isolated = Bs Node 13 in switching for SF alarm =B Node 4=intermediate Nodes 1,2,3,4 in switching for SF alarm =B Node 1: isolated=Bs Nodes 2,4 in switching for SF alarm=B Node 3= intermediate Node 1,2 in switching for alarm=B Nodes 3,4 = intermediate Node 2: isolated=Bs Node 1,3 in switching for SF alarm=B Node 4 = intermediate
RN
SN OS AN
RN
Figure 260. 2F Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization The same reference Figure 258. and Figure 259. schemas are applied to describe dual generic Events where both ring failures and external commands are considered. The first row at the top of the protection table (Figure 261. ) shows the Events at the reference point. For each of them the associated Event is listed on the first column at the left of the table. Two manual ring commands can be only signalled: Bs (Manual SSSN and OSAN commands give the same ring protection switching and then both can be served). Two Lockout commands are both always served: B Force command has priority with respect to the Manual one. Automatic protection has priority with respect to the Manual command. Force Ring and Automatic Protection (or two Force ring commands) are always served if they are not applied on the SSSN. In this last case has to be considered the priority level. The behavior is that seen for two automatic protection switching ( Figure 259. ) Lockout working SSSN has priority with respect to Manual, Automatic protection and Force commands. In the other cases, both commands are served (B). Lockout protection SSSN / OSAN and Manual or Automatic or Force command are both served because the switching SSSN / OSAN channels are not managed by the lockout protection: B. Lockout protection SSAN / OSSN overrides the Manual or Automatic or Force command because the lockout protection controls the switching channels of the same Node.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Lockout protection SSRN / OSRN and manual or automatic or force command: the lockout protection prevents the working 18 channels from being inserted into the protecting 916 ones. The lockout protection is served, because it has a higher priority, the ring protection will be only signalled (pending).
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Reference point Other points

SN SS AN RN SN OS AN RN SN Ring SS AN RN SN OS AN RN SN Lockout Working SS AN RN SN OS AN RN SN SS AN RN SN OS AN RN Ring
Automatic Manual Ring Working Ring Force Ring Protection Lockout Working
Bs Bs Bs B Bs C C C C C C C B B B B B B C CRs C B CRs
R R R R R R C B B B B B C B B B B B B C CRs C B CRs
R R R R R R B B B B B C B B B B B B C CRs C B CRs
B R RCs R B RCs B R RCs R B RCs
R B B B B B R B B B B B
Lockout Protecting
Figure 261. Tail / head dual Events Protection table (2F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Force
Manual
19.5.4 2F Protection Status Visualization The protection statuses ring network are:
1 Lockout Switching 2 Forced Switching 3 Automatic Switching ( MSMSPRing protection for equipment/signal failure ). 4 Manual Switching 5 Idle ( regular operation without MSSPRing protection )
These protection states are represented with the following color state boxes: Green: Active State, No Request condition. Red: Inactive State and any external or protection executed command ( that has been served ). Yellow: ordered but not executed command ( that has only been signalled= pending status ). Greyed: not available state box.
Automatic switching and external commands are revertive: then when the Events have been cleared, the MSSPRing configuration comes back to its idle status. The state boxes visualize the Node Condition Request as a consequence of the equipment/signal failure or the external commands detected on the corresponding side (Event). The state boxes dont describe the protection actions provided on the NEs. The served Events ( B/S=bridges and switches are executed and the network has been updated ) are completed B/S actions visualized as red box indications The signalled Events ( the K1/K2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened ) are pending B/S visualized as yellow box indications. Figure 262. shows the protection status with a served East manual ring command. Any protection status window is divided in different status fields: Schema description and status, Local Conditions, Node Conditions and Protocol Exceptions. The first one describes the network configuration and application type and its status, the second gives the local external commands indications, the third the Events results on the nodes and the fourth one checks the k1/k2 ring protocol. The window is divided into three parts: West, Middle and East. On the West there are all the box indications corresponding to the West protections and commands. In the middle WTRRing refers to West and East sides, No Request corresponding to Idle Status, and Intermediate Node denotes that the protections and commands dont concern the node involved. The Manual Ring command visualizes Manual Ring on the local node and Request Node Ring in the both Local Conditions adjacent East ADM1West ADM2 nodes, while the 3 and 4 nodes are Intermediate Node. The red color means that the command has been served. A regular protocol Exceptions is represented with white boxes, a protocol alarm is signalled with red boxes. The Prot. Unavailable indications are activated when a lockout protection command is applied in a network node.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
ADM4: 1660SM MSSPRINGProtection States and Commands
Figure 262. Manual command applied at the Reference Point ring network Figure 259. Figure 263. reports the Protection Status for external Force and Manual commands in a 3 node ring (A, B, C). Figure 264. shows the lockout statuses and Figure 265. the automatic protection statuses.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Reference node: A A
Force/Manual Ring W B C A
Force/Manual Ring E B C
Local Conditions
Force/ Manual Ring W
Force/ Manual Ring E
Intermediate
Node Conditions
Request Node Ring W
Request Node Ring E
Intermediate
Request Node Ring E
Request Node Ring W
Node
w/p
w/p
Node
B
w/p
A
w/p
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 263. Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Reference node: A
Lockout Working Ring W
Lockout Working Lockout Protecting Lockout Protecting Ring E Span W Span E
Local Conditions
Lockout Ring W
Lockout Ring E
Lockout Prot W
Lockout Prot E
Prot. Unavailable
Prot. Unavailable
Prot. Unavailable
Node Conditions
w/p
w/p
B
w/p
A
w/p
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 264. Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Prot. Unavailable
Intermediate Node
Intermediate Node
Reference node: A
Signal fail/degrade Ring W A B C
Signal fail/degrade Ring E A B C
Node Conditions
Intermediate
Intermediate
w/p
Node
w/p
Node
Request Ring W
Request Ring E
Request Ring E
Request Ring W
B
w/p
A
w/p
Figure 265. Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) The WTR status is visualized on the side where the link has been repaired. The considered network failures are related to a tailend/headend node connection. The WTR Clear command can be executed by the user without waiting the WTR setting time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.5.4.1 Double ring failure The double ring failure visualization of Figure 259. are here following reported.
ADM4: 1660SM MSSPRINGProtection States and Commands ADM1: 1660SM MSSPRINGProtection States and Commands
Figure 266. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSAN) Figure 266. reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSAN. The node 2 isolated, the nodes 23 in switching and the node 4 Intermediate. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active: green Request Node Ring West ADM3East ADM1: red (served) Request Node Ring West ADM2East ADM2: yellow (pending) Intermediate Node ADM4: red
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 267. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSRN) Figure 267. reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference pointSSRN). The nodes 1,2,3,4 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both the two signal failures are served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active: green Request Node Ring East ADM3East ADM1: red (switching for SF) Request Node Ring East ADM4East ADM2: red (switching of the opposite nodes)
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 268. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN) Figure 268. reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN). The nodes 1,2 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both signal failures are served: B. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active: green Request Node Ring West ADM2East ADM1: red (switching for SF) Intermediate Node ADM3ADM4: red
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 269. Protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN) recovering to idle Figure 269. reports the previous protection status with double ring failure (reference pointOSAN) while the ring protection comes back to its idle status. The WTR (Wait To Restore) Ring on ADM1 node becomes red to signal that the SF disappears at the reference point . The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active: green WTR Ring : red (to signal the SF recovering) Request Node Ring West ADM2East ADM1: red Intermediate Node ADM3ADM4: red
ED
01
957.140.602 V
19.5.4.2 Double external command or an external command and a ring failure Some more significative double events of Figure 261. are here following reported.
ADM4: 1660SM MSSPRINGProtection States and Commands ADM1: 1660SM MSSPRINGProtection States and Commands
Figure 270. Double manual ring command (reference pointSSAN) Figure 270. reports the protection status with double manual command (reference pointSSAN). Both the commands can be only pending. The Request ring to 1,2,3 nodes becomes pending while the 4 node is Intermediate node. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active: green Request Node Ring Request Node Ring Request Node Ring Intermediate Node
East ADM1 West ADM2: yellow ( pending ) for Manual Ring East ADM1 East ADM2 West ADM3: yellow ( pending ) for Manual Ring East ADM2 West ADM1 East ADM3: yellow ( pending ) for switching of the opposite nodes ADM4: red
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 271. Double manual ring command (reference pointOSAN) Figure 271. reports the protection status with double manual command (reference pointOSAN). Both the commands can be served. The Request Manual ring to ADM1 (East) and to ADM2 opposite side (West) collapses in the same manual command. Both the manual commands are served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active: green Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2: red ( served ) Intermediate Node ADM3, ADM4: red
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 272. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointSSSN) Figure 272. reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference pointSSSN). Both the manual and the lockout commands are visualized to the same ADM1 node (East). Both the commands are served because the bridge/switch points are different. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: Active: green Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2: red ( served ) Intermediate Node ADM3, ADM4: red Manual Ring and Lockout Prot. commands East ADM1: red Prot. Unavailable East ADM1 : red . N.B. The Prot. Unavailable is not propagated on West ADM2 node because on West ADM2 the protection switching has been executed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 273. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointSSRN) Figure 273. reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference pointSSRN). The manual command is pending while the lockout command is served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: Active: green Manual Ring command East ADM1: yellow Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2 : yellow ( pending ) Request Node Ring West ADM1 East ADM2 : yellow ( pending ) for switching of the opposite nodes Lockout Prot. command: East ADM3 : red Prot. Unavailable East ADM3 and West ADM4: red (served)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 274. Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference pointOSAN) Figure 274. reports the protection status with a ring failure and a manual ring command (reference pointOSAN). The automatic protection has a higher priority with respect to the manual command and then it has been served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active: green Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2 : red (served) Intermediate Node ADM3 ADM4 : red
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 275. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference pointSSAN) Figure 275. reports the protection status with a ring failure and a force ring command (reference pointSSAN). The ADM2 is isolated and the force command is pending. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: Active: green Request Node Ring East ADM1: red (served) the West ADM1 switching is applied for SF Request Node Ring West ADM3: red (served) the East ADM3 switching is applied for the force command Request Node Ring West ADM2, East ADM2: yellow (pending) the ADM2 is isolated Intermediate Node ADM4 : red
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 276. Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference pointSSSN) Figure 276. reports the protection status with a ring failure and a lockout working command (reference pointSSSN). The Lockout command has a higher priority with respect to the automatic protection switching and then only the lockout command has been served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Active: green Lockout Ring command East ADM1: red Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2 : red (served) Intermediate Node ADM3 ADM4 : red
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 277. Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference pointOSRN) The lockout protection has a higher priority with respect to the automatic ring protection. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: Active: green Lockout Prot. command West ADM3: red Prot. Unavailable West ADM3 East ADM2 : red (lockout protection is served) Request Node Ring East ADM1 West ADM2 : yellow (automatic protection is pending) Intermediate Node ADM4 : red
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
364 / 386
20 ATM/IP/ETH CONFIGURATION 20.1 Introduction

This Chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM/IP/ETH boards creation in the Equipment view and the ATM/IP/ETH TTPs creation; as a matter of fact ATM/IP/ETH boards does not crate TTPs when they are configurated. The ATM/ETH/IP board creation is performed (following the same rules of all the other SDH/PDH ports as explained in paragraph 9.2 on page 101) when a CT user sets an ATM/IP/ETH board and then configure the IP Address (as described in paragraph 8.13 on page 92). For the TTPs creation refer to paragraph 20.2 where all the operation are explained. For the ATM/IP/ETH traffic configuration (for example creation of Hard/Soft cross connection, PNNI configuration etc.) refer to the relevant OPERATORS HANDBOOK (ATM or IP) where Specific Terminal application is explained in details. The operational sequence to follow to manage ATM/IP/ETH crossconnection is: a) b) c) d) e) ATM/IP/ETH board declaration (Equipment Set) ATM/IP/ETH IP Address Configuration ( Called ISA board IP Address) ATM/IP/ETH board TTPs creation (VC44c TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP) TTPs crossconnection ( refer to paragraph 15.3 on page 228) ATM/IP/ETH traffic configuration with Specific Terminal application
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
20.2 ATM/IP/ETH board TTPs creation

In this paragraph will be explained how to create, delete and modify ATM/IP/ETH TTPs. ATM board On the ATM 4X4 board can be configurated up to 16 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP) with the following restriction: In this release it is not possible to manage structured and unstructured TPs on the same board the maximum throughput is 622 Mbit/s
On the ATM 8X8 board can be configurated up to 32 TPs (VC44c TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP) with a maximum throughput is 1.2 Gbit/s. IP board On the IP boards (IP 4X4 and IPGETH) can be configurated up to 31 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP). ETHERNET board On the ETHERNET board can be configurated up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP) on the port card and up 14 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP) on the relevant access card. Select ATM/IP/ETH Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/IP/ETH ports Configuration (see Figure 278. on page 366).
ETHMB
ATM 4X4 MATRIX
Figure 278. ATM/IP/ETH ports Configuration (examples) The ATM/IP/ETH ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ATM, ETH or IP board with relevant ports;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The user can create a new port, delete an existing one and change port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM1 Time Slot on ATM ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
When the user want to create a new ATM, IP or ETH port he can select an empty row, then in the Selected Item section , he can fill the field Signal choosing among the available options and push theCreate button. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. An example of ATM port creation is depicted in Figure 279. on page 367. If the user want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row, then in the Selected Item section he can change the fields STM1 number and STM1 Time Slot and than push the Time Slot Sw. button. To delete a port the user can select a row and push Delete button.
Figure 279. ATM ports Configuration (example) To close the dialog box click on the Close push button. It is possible to see the ATM, IP or ETH Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant board in the Equipment view and double clicking on it; Figure 280. on page 368 shows an example.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Subsequently select the PSEUDO SUBBOARD icon in the Equipment view and double click on it, Figure 281. on page 368 opens showing the ATM ports. Figure 282. and Figure 283. show other examples for Ethernet ports.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 280. ATM board view (example)
Pseudo Subboard icon
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 281. ATM PSEUDOSUBBOARD view (example)
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
368 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Figure 282. ETHERNET board view (example)
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
Figure 283. ETHERNET port view (example)
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
369 / 386
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
370 / 386
21 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT 21.1 Generalities and descriptions

The Craft Terminal provides a set of functions which allow software packages manipulation within NEs. The downloading operation consists in the establishment of session between the NE and a software server for the purpose of file transfer. Actions can then be performed on the NE software version as update and activation operation, or roll back to the previous software version operation. In this way the NE can follow the product evolution with in service equipment. The same function is used during maintenance phase, to update spare boards for substitution after troubleshooting. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: display Software Download Information, initiate / Abort Software Package Download, manage Software Packages within NEs, activating the downloaded Software Package or coming back to the previous condition.
A backup/restore can be also done on the MIB of the NE. Indeed the MIB can be saved to or restored from the mass storage of the Craft Terminal. The software download general principle is represented in the following figure.
Software Management OPERATOR MANAGER Download Control
Event Report Transfer Request
AGENT NE CLIENT
Software Downloading OPERATOR
SERVER
Binary & Data Files
Figure 284. Software Download general principle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
21.1.1 Naming Conventions The naming conventions used for Download Management are the following: Software Package: Software Package stands for a piece of software which can be executed by an NE of a particular type. It consists in one or more Software Units and a Descriptor File. A software package is identified by its name, release, version and edition. On the NE (i.e. once downloaded) a software package can be: the active version: the software package currently running on the NE a standby version: a software package which is neither the active version nor the boot version Software Unit: A Software Unit is a part of a software package which can be either executable code or a data segment of a particular board within an NE. A software unit is also identified by its name, release, version and edition. Descriptor File: A Descriptor File contains information about the software package it belongs to and lists the composing software units. Each software package must have a descriptor file otherwise it would not be possible to interpret the content of the package. Software Management Function: The Software management function offers information about all current software packages present in an NE. Indicators enable software management (running package, activated package, etc...).
The following software version states are available: Commit (active) version: the software version currently running on the NE. Standby version: is a software version which has been downloaded on the NE but which is not in the active state. Two main functions are involved in the software downloading: Software Download Manager function Software Download Server function The Software Download Manager function takes the downloading and management requests of the operator and sends them to the NE. Thus, this function enables a download process to be initiated and monitored by the operator. It manages the NE software releases and initiates software download operations. The Software Download Server is only responsible for fulfilling the requests received from NEs and performing software package file transfer operations to the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
21.2 Software download operative sequence

Two main different operative condition are defined for this Equipment:
First installation of a 1660SM The NE is received without the relevant software install. The software download must be done as described in the SIBDL section of this Handbook. Updating a 1660SM with an already installed software. Follow the operative indications of para. 21.2.1 on page 373 .
21.2.1 Software Download upgrade N.B. In order to migrate from Release 1.1A to a Higher Release, the download procedure requires two steps. The first is from 1.1A to 1.1X (intermediate package) and the second is from 1.1X to the Higher Release (e.g. 1.1B1).
In order to update the following procedure is to be done as explained in the next steps: a) Install the CD ROM with the NE Software Package on the PC, as for the procedure of para 21.2.2 on page 373. open a session on Craft Terminal application (startup of the application, start supervision and NE login) Check the present status of the software on a selected NE. Download should not be performed in presence of unstable alarms d) e) Open the Download menu as for para. 21.3 on page 380. Select the new software package in the server and triggers the download process, as presented at para.21.4 on page 381. A message will indicate the completed download. Activate the package as presented at para.21.5 on page 383. Check that the activated package is in the Commit status. If problems are found with the new activated package, activate the previous software package (revertback operation) to come back to the previous condition and then try to repeat the procedure.
b)
c)
f) g) h)
21.2.2 NE Software package installation procedure The following procedure allows the NE software package installation. According to the customer requirement two types of installation are possible: [1] If only SDH software package installation is required follow the instruction from point a ) to point e ) and than download the software package SDH (example 1660SM 2.1B.09) from the EMLUSM (refer to paragraph 21.4 for details). If SDH+Specific Software package installation is required follow the instruction from point a ) to point n ). In the example that follows will be described the ATM specific software installation; following the same rule will be possible to install also the IP specific software.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[2]
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Procedure a) Install from CD ROM the NE Software Package on the Personal Computer, as explained in the 1320CT Basic Operator Handbook. Run the 1320CT V.x platform From Network Element Synthesis (NES) choose the Software Administration option of the Supervision > File Administration menu (see Figure 285. )
b) c)
Figure 285. Software Administration menu After the selection Figure 286. will be opened.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 286. Software Package Administration view
ED
01
957.140.602 V
d) e)
Select the <SDH> tag Press the <INSTALL> button to install the relevant software package. In the window that opens select the directory where the NE software package file has been installed (typically is Alcatel/usm/ect/swdw/<equipment name>/<version>/<descriptor file>) and execute (see Figure 287. )
Figure 287. SDH software package installation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
f) g) h)
Insert the ATM CD ROM in the computer Select the <SERV. SPEC.> tag Press the <INSTALL> button to install the ATM software package present on the ATM CD ROM In the window that opens select the directory where the ATM software package file has been installed (typically is /ect/swdw/<atm>/<version>/<descriptor file>) and execute (see Figure 288. )
Figure 288. ATM software package installation (example) Click on Ok to continue;

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
i) j)
Select the <SDH> tag Select the SDH software package base onto which ATM software package has to be merged Press <Create Enhanced> to launch the software merging process and create the SDH+ATM software package The New Software package will be created (see Figure 289. )
k)
Figure 289. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A) Click on Yes button to continue; Figure 290. will be opened.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
OMSN version OMSN name
Figure 290. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) The originated Enhanced software package has a new label as follows: OMSN name = is the SDH name + E letter OMSN version = is the SDH version Example: Starting from SDH SWP 1660SM ver. 3.xy.wz will be created the OMSN SWP 1660SME ver. 3.xy.wz l) Select the previously created software package (example 1660SME 3.1.08)
m ) Select the ATM software package (in the right view) (example ATM 1.01.07) n) Press the <ADD> button , so the new software package will be created (refer to Figure 291. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 291. Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) It is now possible to download the enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) from the EMLUSM (refer to paragraph 21.4 for details).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
21.3 Software Download Manager menu

All the software download operations are carried out from the software download manager.
Figure 292. Equipment view To display the software download manager menu from the main view, select the NE on which you want to perform download operations, then select the Download pull down menu. The following menu is displayed:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 293. Download menu
ED
01
957.140.602 V
21.4 Init download

You can request the NE to start / abort a software download operation. After selecting the desired NE you must choose an available software package and then start the download process. All these operations can be performed from the SW downloading dialogue box. Select the Init download option from the Download cascading menu. The Software download initiate dialogue box is opened.
Figure 294. SW Downloading dialogue box example The following fields are available to search a specific package: Server filter: to enter the server name selected, Package filter: to enter the package name selected.
To use the filter and display the selection, push on Apply filter(s) button. The SW packages existing on the Craft Terminal are displayed. In the next field the list of the packages is displayed: Server: name of the server, Package: name of the package, Version: version number of package.
Click on Forced push button to set the forced download attribute: then all software units of the Descriptor file have to be downloaded. Otherwise only the units with different software version will be loaded.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If you want stop the download, click on the Cancel push button of the Software download initiate dialogue box to close it.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Figure 295. Software download in progress (example) The Software download in Progress dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE and the SW package name, the total of bytes, the current percentage and the current file which is being downloaded. Click on the Abort push button to abort the complete download transaction. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the abort. Click on the Close push button to close the SWDL Work in Progress dialogue box at the end of the software download.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Click on the OK push button to start the download. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the download. If you confirm the operation, the SW Downloading dialogue box then disappears and the Software download in Progress dialogue box is displayed (see Figure 295. ) from which you can if necessary abort the software download. You can monitor the download progress by means of the Software in Progress dialogue box which also enables you to possibly abort the current download.
21.5 SW package Activation and Units information

This item permits to activate the downloaded software package and to get information about the software of the various units of the equipment. The operator is able to get information about the software package of the NE at any moment, even if no download operations have been performed previously. For this, select the Units info option from the Download pull down menu. The following dialogue box is opened.
Figure 296. Software Package Information dialogue box (example) The SW Information dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE, and the respective package name and status of the committed and (if existing) the uncommitted software. You can select one software package by clicking on the name. The following fields are displayed: Software package: name, release, version, edition of the package, Service Specific Components: name, release, version, edition of the Service Specific Components (example ATM, IP etc.) Operational state: enabled or disabled, Activation date: date and hour of the last activation Vendor: the supplier of the product, Current state\Action: commit or standby and with the option button; none/Force/Activate/Delete current state = standby means the package is not active on the NE current state = commit means the package is active on the NE action = (none) means no action to do action = activate serves to activate the selected SW package action = force
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Select the Activate option of the CurrentState\Action field, to activate the Software package The Sw units Det. button allows to give more information about a selected software package. Clicking on it, the following window is displayed:
Figure 297. Detail software package (example) Clicking on [] symbol behind each software package all details disappear. When you click on Close the previous view is displayed (Figure 296. ). In Figure 296. when you click on the: OK push button you close dialogue box, Cancel push button you close the SW Information dialogue box, Help push button you access to help on context.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
21.6 Mib management

This function allows to make a backup and/or a restore of the Mib.. (MIB is a data base pertaining the configuration of the equipment). Select the Mib management option from the Download pull down menu. The following window is displayed:
Figure 298. NE MIB management The following fields are displayed: Available backups on local server: gives the list of the backups available on the Craft Terminal, Backup name: to enter the new backup name.
Three push buttons allow to choose the action with click on: Backup: performs the backup on the CT of the Mib present on the NE, Restore: this function allows the managing system to restore the NE configuration database of the managed system. Only one restore operation can be performed at the same time on a given NE. Delete: this action allows to delete a backup of the NE database. The NE is not involved in this action. The only effect is to delete the selected backup version stored in a specific directory of the FT server.
To activate an already restored MIB you click on Activate push button. Only at this point it becomes operative on the NE. To exit of the NE MIB management window, you click on Close push button.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To save or load the Mib to/from an external disk follow the indication of the Basic 1320CT Operators Handbook using the menu options of the Network Element Synthesis.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED END OF DOCUMENT
01
957.140.602 V
SC.3:NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
386
386 / 386
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 MAINTENANCE OF THE PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Troubleshooting organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 On site Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Alarm synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 Alarm Surveillance (AS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 Port View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.6 Board view alarms and states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.7 Subrack and Rack view alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.8 Equipment View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.9 External Points alarms (HouseKeepings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 EQUICO unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 9 11 11 11 13 13 13 16 19 20 21 22 24 28 33 35 38 39 41 41 43
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ED
01
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 80755 BA AA 52 1 / 52
957.140.602 V
6.3 ATM MATRIX 8X8 unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 IP MATRIX unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 MATRIX substitution with MATRIXN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 P4S1, S41, L41, L42, S161, L161, L162 substitution with P4S1N, S41N, L41N, L42N , S161N, L161N, L162N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FLASH CARD SUBSTITUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45 46
47 48 49 51
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V

FIGURES Figure 1. General Flowchart for on site troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2. Power supply alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3. Transmission network level structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4. Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5. Alarm pull down menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6. Alarm Surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7. Example of SDH Port View alarms (without MSP schema) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8. Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9. Example of ATM Port View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10. Example of Ethernet Port View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11. Example of SDH Board View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12. Example of PDH Board View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13. Example of Subrack view alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14. Example of Rack view alarm and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 15. Fans subrack alarms view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 16. Example of Equipment View alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 17. Example of External Points alarms and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 18. EQUICO unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 19. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement without EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 20. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 21. FLASH CARD substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLES Table 1. Alarms colors and Severity association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Alarm Synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. Management States Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. Alarm Surveillance information general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17 18 20 21 24 24 29 30 31 32 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 42 43 44 52
22 22 23 23 25 26
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
4 / 52

1.1.1 Document scope The Maintenance Manual mainly describes the NE troubleshooting with Craft Terminal. 1.1.2 Target audience The Maintenance Manual is intended for all users. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook
The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: Introduction manual NE Management manual
1.2 Terminology
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
6 / 52
2 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION
The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps:
Maintenance of the PC. See Chapter 3 on page 9 Problems with Craft terminal (shutdown and restart of the PC). See Chapter 4 on page 11. Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting). See Chapter 5 on page 13. Unit replacement with a spare. See Chapter 6 on page 41.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
8 / 52
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
With regard to maintenance PC, refer to the constructors documentation.
01
3 MAINTENANCE OF THE PC
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
9 / 52
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
10 / 52
4 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL 4.1 Purpose of the procedure

This procedure describes the Shutdown and restart the PC should the Craft Terminal SoftWare Product not be working properly or not responding to the operators commands.
4.2 Procedure
In order to shut down the PC execute the command : Start > Shut down A window (Windows NT Security user dialog) is displayed. It permits to shut down the computer or restart it. The same window is displayed pressing he keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
12 / 52
5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) 5.1 Purpose of the procedure

Troubleshooting involves the detection, location and correction of failures in the equipment and the replacement of the defective parts.
5.2 Troubleshooting organization

The troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the help of some flowcharts and tables, reported hereinafter. Anyway this method does not deal with the following aspects (which are to be deduced in other ways): faulty electronic alarm indication, processing and detection circuits faulty wiring (backpanel, connectors, etc.)
The following interfaces are present to troubleshoot the equipment : Q3 interface for Telecommunication Management Network F interface for Craft Terminal (Local or Remote) Remote Alarm for Supervisory Center LEDs on the units of the NE
Usually maintenance is firstly done via software (TMN or Remote Craft Terminal) to locate the faulty equipment and the faulty unit or the faulty path and then on site to physically solve the trouble. The Maintenance can be done : from a TMN network management center from a Remote Craft Terminal (RCT) management center from a station supervisory center on site
TMN network management center: by means of the TMN the maintenance technician can see the alarms sent by each equipment of the managed network (see the relevant TMN handbooks). Remote craft terminal: the operator, connected to a local NE , can remotely manage and troubleshooting a network composed of max 32 NEs included itself. This handbook is used. Station supervisory center: the maintenance technician refers to the Remote Alarms received from the equipment in a centralized office of the station i.e. : T URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL), T NOT URGENT (MINOR): remote alarms pertaining to the urgent, not urgent alarm type. TOR, TAND: remote alarms respectively due to the decrease or loss of one or both station power supply DC voltages. INT: Remote alarm pertaining to the local (internal) alarm type When a second CONGI unit is used the following remote alarms are added: TORC, TANC: remote alarms respectively due to the loss of +3,3V generated by the on board converter in of one or both the CONGI units. IND: Indeterminate alarm synthesis. Indicates synthesis of alarms not associated to others severities. Not operative. TUP: remote alarm due to microprocessor fault in the EQUICO unit LOSQ2: remote alarm due to loss of communication with Mediation Device. Not operative.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Depending on the supervisory center organization, it is possible to locate the equipment in troubles and to detect the failure type and source.
On site : the operator is on site in case : 1) 2) 3) 4) the equipment is not managed by a TMN or by a Remote Craft terminal (RCT) the equipment is not reachable by the remote manager (TMN or RCT) and is therefore isolated link problems are present the trouble has been located and a substitution is necessary
In case 1 ) , 2 ), 3 ), the alarmed equipment is checked by means of the local Craft Terminal and of rack LED indications and station buzzers. The NE is provided with LEDs which indicate:
Units Alarms: Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor LED (green/red) or multicolor LED (green/red/yellow) at the bottom of the front coverplate. Bicolor LED indicates: when red, internal failure (indicates that the unit concerned must be replaced) when green, in service unit Multicolor LED indicates: when red, internal failure (indicates that the unit concerned must be replaced) when green, in service unit when yellow, means that the unit is part of an EPS schema and its status is standby
ATM unit Alarms: All the alarm detected on the unit are related to the ATM traffic management; on the front coverplate are present optical indication (LEDs) with the following meaning (from the top to the bottom): Red LED : detection of an MAJOR or CRITICAL (URGENT) alarm Red LED : detection of a MINOR (NOT URGENT) alarm Yellow LED : alarm condition ATTENDED Yellow LED : detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Yellow LED : detection of an WARNING (INDICATIVE) alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Centralized Equipment Alarms: All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the EQUICO unit which will deliver centralized optical indications (by means of LEDs on its front coverplate). Specifically, from the top to the bottom : Red LED: detection of an URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL) alarm Red LED: detection of a NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm Yellow LED: alarm condition ATTENDED Yellow LED: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS Yellow LED: detection of an INDICATION (WARNING) alarm
The analysis of these LEDs permits to detect the alarm type (Urgent Not Urgent Indication) and relevant condition (Abnormal condition, Attended). In case of URGENT or NOT URGENT alarm, after having located the alarmed equipment, the alarm condition can be attended by pressing the relevant alarm storing push button on the EQUICO unit. This condition causes: On the rack the YELLOW LED to light up the RED LED to go off
On the front coverplate: yellow LED (ATTENDED) to light up red LEDs NOT URGENT (MINOR) and URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL) to turn off (free to accept other alarms) If both LEDs are on, the Attend command should be given twice : one for attending the NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm and one for attending the URGENT (MAJOR) alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.3 On site Troubleshooting

The troubleshooting operation proceeds according to the information indicated in the flowcharts: Figure 1. on page 17: General flowchart Figure 2. on page 18: Power supply alarm
and according to para.5.4 on page 19. As indicated in the flowcharts the troubleshooting operation is done by means of the Craft Terminal, and of the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the NE. The Craft Terminal is cordconnected to the relative connector on the EQUICO unit front coverplate (F interface). The Craft Terminal applications provide detailed information on the alarm state thus facilitating fault location and subsequent removal as indicated in para. 5.4 on page 19. To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the exact equipment configuration (see Equipment Configuration applications on the Craft Terminal). The aim of the flowcharts which follow and of the maintenance tables is to locate the faulty unit and to replace it with a spare as well as to locate a failure along the link. The flowcharts/tables should be also consulted when the unit LEDs flash, because the flashing condition might be due to external alarm causes usually related to line problems.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
START
AN ALARM IS PRESENT
IN CASE OF URGENT OR NOT URGENT ALARM ATTEND IT WITH THE BUTTON ON THE EQUICO UNIT
IS THE EQUICO BICOLOR LED RED?
NO
IS THE EQUICO UNIT RED LED URGENT (MAJOR) ON ? YES YES IS NO ONE OF THE BICOLOR LEDS INDICATING UNIT FAILURE RED? YES NO TRANSITORY FAILURE REPLACE THE UNIT IN ALARM. BY CONNECTING THE PC AND ACCORDING THE TYPE OF FAILURE AND THE TRAFFIC DAMAGE THE FAULTY UNIT CAN BE REPLACED (OR NOT) IN CASE OF LOW TRAFFIC . NO
THROUGH PUSHBUTTON RESET THE UNIT
DOES THE ALARM CONDITION PERSIST ? YES
THE UNIT IS FAULTY. REPLACE IT ACCORDING TO THE DESCRIBED PROCEDURE (see chapter 6 on page 41)
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT AND, ACCORDING TO THE TYPE OF DETECTED ALARM, PROCEED AS STATED IN PARA 5.4 ON PA GE 19
YES END
YES END
IS THE NO EQUICO UNIT NOT URGENT (MINOR) YELLOW LED ON ? YES
IN EQUICO UNIT THE INDICATION (WARNING) YELLOW ALARM IS ON. MAINTENANCE OPERATION MUST BE PERFORMED ON THE EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO THE LOCAL ONE. CONNECT THE PC AND ACCORDING TO THE TYPE OF ALARM PROCEED AS INDICATED IN PARA 5.4 ON PA GE 19
CONNECT THE PC TO THE EQUIPMENT, AFTER HAVING DETECTED THE TYPE OF FAILURE, ESTABLISH IF INTERVENTION MUST BE IMMEDIATE OR NOT AS STATED IN THE RELATIVE PARA 5.4 ON PA GE 19
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 1. General Flowchart for on site troubleshooting
ED
01
957.140.602 V
WARNING!
Before removing CONGI unit from subrack, switchoff the relevant Station Battery Fuse Breaker present at the top of the Rack or in the Station Distribution Frame; subsequently remove the station battery cable if necessary and then extract the CONGI unit.
ALL LEDS OFF
START
IS REMOTE ALARM TAND PRESENT ? (N.B.) YES STATION POWER SUPPLY FAILURE
NO
OVERLOAD LIKELY TO HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY ONE OF THE ASSEMBLY UNITS. SUBSTITUTE THE FUSE ON THE CONGI UNIT
YES ARE LEDS ACTIVE?
TRANSITORY OVERLOAD
YES END NO REMOVE ALL THE UNITS FROM THE SUBRACK AND SUBSTITUTE THE FUSE IF NECESSARY. INSERT THEM BACK ONE AT A TIME TILL THE ONE CAUSING THE FAILURE IS DETECTED. HENCE REPLACE IT. SUBSTITUTE THE FUSE IF NECESSARY.
END
N.B.
IF THE REMOTE ALARMS ARE NOT UTILIZED CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF STATION POWER SUPPLY. SHOULD IT HAVE FAILED THEN ALL THE UNITS LEDS WILL BE OFF (FOLLOW OUTPUT YES OF THE FLOWCHART). IF POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT PROCEDE WITH OUTPUT NO.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 2. Power supply alarm
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal.

The troubleshoot proceeds checking the detailed information on the NE alarm by means of the craft terminal. The information on the NE alarm will be mainly obtained by means of the craft terminal through the Alarm Surveillance data and the alarms/status indications presented in the various views, depending on the level of the structure under observation. Navigation across the various level views is done from higher to lower levels, by double clicking on the objects (see instructions on NE management section). The NE hierarchy is organized in the following order: NE > rack > subrack > board > port > TP. The troubleshoot procedure with the the Craft Terminal consists of the following steps: a) The alarms/status view organization for the equipment is shown in Figure 4. pg. 21. Observe the active alarms on the Severity Alarm Synthesis, Domain Alarm Synthesis and Management States Control Panel always present on the window (it resumes all the NE alarms). Table 2. on page 22 describes the meaning of these alarms/statuses and the relevant maintenance actions. in case of alarm presence, access the Alarm Surveillance to troubleshoot. This application gives the details of the detected alarms and helps for their localization. Para 5.4.4 on page 24 describes this view. It is possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE, following the indication of para 5.4.5 on page 28. It is also possible to check alarm and status at Board view, Subrack view and Equipment view are also supplied following the indication of para 5.4.6 on page 33 and para 5.4.8 on page 38. Eventual housekeeping alarms can be localized following the indications given in para. 5.4.9 on page 39. These above said paragraphs describe general aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that can be done with the information given in the applications. The history of past events can be obtained by means of the Event log option of the Diagnosis pull down menu (see NE management section).
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
In case of unit replacement, follow the indications reported in Chapter. 6 on page 41. Troubleshooting with Automatic Laser Shutdown The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is used to protect the operator who is working with the optical fiber. When the ALS is active, it may be difficult to detect the link failed. To locate it, it is necessary to force on the ALS, thus enabling the optical power transmission on the opposite direction of the failed link. WARNING: During this phase the operator has to pay attention when working with fibers and connectors. The ABNORMAL indication inform the operator of the ALS forced condition. After having completed the maintenance, enable the ALS. The ALS states are indicated in the port view, as described in para. 5.4.5 on pg. 28.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4.1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions The following concepts and definitions are considered useful to facilitate maintenance operations with the aid of the previously indicated tables. The various units specified in the synchronous multiplexing hierarchy imply structuring the Transmission network into three levels (sublevels of the physical OSI level): Transmission bearer level. It is the support for the path level and can be further split into physical level (Transmission media) and Transmission section level. The sections can be either regenerator or multiplexer and utilized for specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. The interface alarms (or section alarms, indicated in the tables) belong to this level (example: Line LOS, LOS, B2etc.). Path level It concerns the data transfer between the access points and the path. It does not depend on the service nor on the type of Transmission media. It constitutes the circuit level support. The path can be either lower order (LO) or higher order (HO) depending on the capacity of data transferring. Like the regenerator and multiplexer sections, the paths too have specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. The alarms listed in the cited tables, where path level troubleshooting is required, belong to this level (example:TUAIS, TU LOP). Circuit level. This level concerns the transfer of information between the access points and the circuit proper. It is a direct support for the telecommunication services. It superimposes the SDH function and is considered as the transport agent hence no SDH orderwire channel associated functions are required. An example of this level alarm is Tributary LOS.
The above level structuring in the Transmission network is depicted in Figure 3.
G.703 STMN G.703 STMN TRIBUTARIES SDH MUX REGENERATOR SDH MUX STMN SDH MUX TRIBUTARIES
RSOH REGENERATOR SECTION
RSOH REGENERATOR SECTION
MSOH MULTIPLEXER SECTION
POH PATH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 3. Transmission network level structure
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4.2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view) Severity alarms synthesis Menu bar Domain alarms synthesis
View title
Boards Alarms View area
Message/status area
Administrative state indications Management status control panel
Figure 4. Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view)
the critical (CRI) or major (MAJ) alarms indicate severe alarms that could have impact on the current traffic (interruption or degrade). Thus requiring a rapid intervention to restore the regular working condition of the equipment. A message under the mouse facility provides the alarm or status complete denomination. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4.3 Alarm synthesis indication Alarms and Statuses synthesis are given in all the screens. The alarms CRI, MAJ, MIN, WNG, IND are part of the Severity Alarms Synthesis area, presented in Table 2. on page 22. The alarms EXTP, EQP, TRNS are part of the Domain Alarms Synthesis area, presented inTable 3. on page 23. The alarms SUP, LAC, COM, OS, MGR, NTP and AC are part of the Management States Control Panel, presented in Table 4. on page 23. All these indications (except for SUP, LAC, COM, OS, MGR and NTP) are the summaries of particular types of alarms detected by the equipment, hence the specific cause of alarm is to be found as indicated in the following paragraphs: 5.4.4, 5.4.5, 5.4.6, 5.4.7, 5.4.9. Table 1. reports the association between the colors of the Alarms and their Severity. For the Domain Alarms Synthesis the color corresponds to the highest severity among the set of the active alarms for the relevant domain, according to the same rules of previous Table 1. Table 1. Alarms colors and Severity association Alarm Color RED ORANGE YELLOW CYAN WHITE GREEN Severity CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR WARNING INDETERMINATE NO ALARM
Table 2. Alarm Synthesis indication Mnemonic CRI Alarm/Status Description Critical alarm Maintenance Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting (typical: NE isolation). NB1. See detailed indication in the following para. Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting. NB1. See detailed indication in the following para. Synthesis of alarms for which a delayed troubleshooting can be defined. NB1. See detailed indication in the following para. Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the network. NB1. See detailed indication in the following para. Synthesis of alarms not associated to the previous severities. Not operative. See detailed indication in the following para.
MAJ
Major (Urgent) alarm
MIN
Minor (Not urgent) alarm
WNG
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Warning alarm
IND
Indeterminate alarm
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Table 3. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication Mnemonic

Alarm/Status Description External Point (Housekeeping alarm) Synchronization alarm Equipment alarm Transmission alarm
Maintenance Check the relevant station alarm associated to the input housekeeping indication. See detailed indication in the following para. Synthesis of alarms of the Synchronization domain. See unit detailed indication in the following para. Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain. See unit detailed indication in the following para. Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain. See unit detailed indication in the following para.
EXTP
SYNC EQP TRNS
Table 4. Management States Control Panel. Mnemonic SUP Description Supervision state Maintenance GREEN: NE is under supervision. BROWN: NE is not under supervision. Used in the OS. GREEN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted). CYAN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not the OS permission to manage the NE (denied). GREEN: Identifies the Enable operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH service link up) RED: Identifies the Disable operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH service link down) GREEN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the 1353SH CYAN: Indicates that the N.E. is managed by the 1353SH. GREEN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the 1354RM CYAN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the 1354RM GREEN: NTP protocol enabled and both NTP servers (main and spare) are unreachable. BROWN: NTP protocol disabled. CYAN: NTP protocol enabled and at least one NTP servers (main or spare) are reachable. GREEN: normal operating condition. CYAN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
Local Access State
COM
NE unreachable/unreachable
OS
Operational System Isolation
MGR
Manager level
NTP
Network Time Protocol
AC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Abnormal Condition
NB1:
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile can modify the assignment of each alarm root to the various synthesis. 01 SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 80755 BA AA 52 23 / 52
ED
957.140.602 V
5.4.4 Alarm Surveillance (AS) In case of alarm presence, access the Alarm Surveillance (AS) to troubleshoot. For this purpose select the Diagnosis pull down menu. With the Alarm pull down menu (see Figure 5. ). It is possible to show all the NE Alarms or filter the alarms report, for example displaying only the alarms of a specific domain (i.e. only alarms of the Equipment domain).
Figure 5. Alarm pull down menu. After the selection a list with a synthesis of the Alarm Surveillance is presented and immediately after also the detailed list of the Alarm Surveillance (see Figure 6. ). In the synthesis list it is possible to filter the data to show with the detailed view, double clicking on the selected row of the sublist of Figure 6.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 6. Alarm Surveillance
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Detailed information of each alarm are supplied. The alarms scenario is indicated by the colors of the alarms and by the information displayed in the table. For instance, if an alarm is still active, the whole row has the same color of its relevant Perceived Severity; else if it has been cleared, the color of the row is green (except the Perceived Severity). The same information is reported in the Clearing Status column. In the following are shortly described the main information obtained in the AS view, starting from the left column: Table 5. Alarm Surveillance information general description
TITLE Perceived Severity Event date and time Friendly Name
DESCRIPTION The severity assigned to the alarm is indicated, with the relevant color, i.e.: MAJOR, MINOR, WARNING.... Indicates year, month, day and hour of the alarm. Identify the rack, subrack, board, port, and TP in which the alarm is detected, i.e.: / r01sr1sl09/#port01E1S Indicates the family type of the alarm as subdivided in the ASAP list, i.e.: EQUIPMENT, COMMUNICATION, The fault/problem is indicated, i.e.: loss of signal, transmitter degraded, replaceable unit missing,resource isolation, ... Indicates if the alarm is reserved (RSV) or not (NRSV) according security management. Indicates if the alarm condition is terminated (CLR) or is still active (NCLR). If cleared it has a green background, Indicates if the alarm has been acknowledge (ACK) with the button on the EQUICO unit or not ( NACK).
Event Type
Probable Cause
Reservation Status
Clearing status
Acknowledge status
Correlated notification Not used flag Repetition counter Not used
The information supplied help the operator during the troubleshooting operation. Table 6. on page 26 supply general indications of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that can be done with the information given in the applications. The maintenance action must take into account the board where the alarm is detected. External Points alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals. They are available for the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector. Detailed description of this application is given in the AS Operators Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Table 6. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions
MAINTENANCE
Loss of signal (LOS) Transmitter Signal (TF) Transmitter degraded (TD) Loss of frame (LOF) AIS Excessive BER (EBER) Degraded Signal (DS) Loss of Pointer (LOP) Payload Mismatch (PLM) Far End Received Failure (FERF) Server Signal Failure (SSF) Frequency offset (DRIFT) Loss of timing source (LOSS) Resource Isolation Communication Subsystem Isolation (CSF) Unequipped (U) Referred to Signal Label Unconfigured Equipment Present (UEP)
Check line Replace unit Replace unit when possible (laser degrade) Check line (alignment problems due to line error) Check connected equipment Check line (excessive line BER) Check line (line signal degrade) Check line Configuration error Check farend equipment Check all the TU path. Alarm indicates AIS signal received on the TU Check reference and connection between it and the equipment Check reference and connection between it and the equipment Check connection between NE and Craft Terminal Check Communication configuration (LAPD)
Configuration error
Unit inserted but not declared
Internal Communication ProbReset NE. If persists substitute EQUICO unit lem URU Underlying Resource Insert the board Unavailable PM_AS Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis Check path / line section interested to the indication.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CPECommunication protocol Check MSP protocol (architecture type, switch fail) error LOMF Loss Of MultiFrame PTM Path Trace Mismatch Check payload structure Not operative in current release
ED
01
957.140.602 V
PROBABLE CAUSE NAME AND/OR ACRONYM OF DISPLAYED ALARM
PROBABLE CAUSE NAME AND/OR ACRONYM OF DISPLAYED ALARM

MAINTENANCE
AUXP
Check farend equipment
Remote Node Transmission Check farend equipment error (RNTE)
PROBABLE CAUSE NAME AND/OR ACRONYM OF DISPLAYED ALARM Board alarms Unit missing (RUM) Unit Problem (RUP) Unit type mismatch (RUTM) Version mismatch (VM) Cooling Fans Failure (CFF) LAN problem (LAN) Internal communication problem (ICP) Insert missing unit Replace unit
MAINTENANCE
Insert right unit (unit inserted into a slot set with another type of unit) Update software version by means of download Check the fan units and substitute the faulty one Check LAN interconnection or substitute CONGI unit Internal dialogue problem in the EQUICO unit. It indicates a temporary condition which will be restored. If the condition persists it is due to a unit hardware failure: in this case it will activate the RUP alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4.5 Port View alarms It is also possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE, following the indication of the Port View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. Figure 7. to Figure 10. are examples of a Port view. For each TP of the Port a detail of the relevant alarms is presented. On the port view the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about: MSP protection (if enable); refer to Figure 8. Automatic Laser Shutdown state; refer to Figure 7. State of the connection for Ethernet port (available only if an ethernet port has been selected); refer to Figure 10.
A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located, in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. The nonalarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color and a sign in the box. The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP) and an X sign in the box. The alarms which can be found in the Port view are listed in Table 6. pg.26, where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too. The information regarding ALS states and Laser state useful for operators safety purpose are reported in the following: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF. In test = The laser restart has been automatically activated . Active = The ALS has been activated (On). Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created). Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created). Off = Laser off (when ALS is created). Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command. Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Mouse message Alarms Alarms
01
957.140.602 V Protection message TPs
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
Figure 7. Example of SDH Port View alarms (without MSP schema)
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
29 / 52
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Alarms Alarms TPs
01
Mouse message
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
MSP Iinformation message
Figure 8. Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema)
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
30 / 52
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Mouse message Alarms
01
957.140.602 V TPs
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
Figure 9. Example of ATM Port View alarms
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
31 / 52
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Mouse message Alarms TPs
01
957.140.602 V State of connection for Ethernet port

SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
Figure 10. Example of Ethernet Port View alarms
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
32 / 52
5.4.6 Board view alarms and states The alarm and status indications at Board level can be obtained, following the indication of the Board View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. Figure 11. and Figure 12. show a examples of Board view. The alarm and status indications depend on the unit type; for example SDH units is organized on two levels of presentation (in the first is selected one of the available ports) and each view contains dedicated indications. An alarm box is displayed on each port, to indicate whether the port is alarmed. An indication in the message/status area provides information about the board Administrative State: inservice or outofservice. The alarms of the board are reported at the bottom of the message/status area, by means of various boxes containing relevant acronyms. The nonalarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color. The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP). A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located, in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. In the view is present the Administrative State information: in service or out of service. The alarms which can be found in the Board view are listed in Table 6. page 26, where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too. In the view can also be present EPS indications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
port alarm synthesis
Administrative State
Board alarms
Figure 11. Example of SDH Board View alarms and status
Administrative State
EPS State
Board alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 12. Example of PDH Board View alarms and status
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4.7 Subrack and Rack view alarms The alarms and status indications at subrack and rack level can be obtained, following the indications given on the previous Section of this Handbook (NE management). Figure 13. and Figure 14. show an examples of Subrack and Rack view. An alarm box is displayed on each board, to indicate whether the board is alarmed. This board alarm summarization is activated when one of the board alarms (those reported at the bottom of the Board view) is active. A lock symbol on a board indicates that it is inservice. Else, the lack of this symbol indicates its outofservice state . (Administrative State information). A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located, in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object.
Severity alarms synthesis Menu bar
Domain alarms synthesis
View title
Boards Alarms iew area
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Message/status area
Administrative state indications
Management status control panel
Figure 13. Example of Subrack view alarms and status
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Severity alarms synthesis Menu bar
Domain alarms synthesis
View title
View area
Fans subrack Alarms
Administrative state indications Message/status area
Management status control panel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 14. Example of Rack view alarm and status
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4.7.1 Fans Subrack alarms view To obtain Fan Subrack alarms indications click twice with the mouse on the relevant subrack drawing in the rack level view. Figure 15. on page 37 is presented: Battery Failure (BF): check that the station battery cables are right connected
Cabling Problem (CAP): check that the alarms cable between the Fans Subrack and the CONGI unit is right connected; check also the configuration in the Equipment menu (Connected FAN to CONGI#10 or Connected FAN to CONGI#12) Temperature Out of Range (TOOR): verify the Fan unit alarm and in presence of faulty substitute the relevant unit; clean also the Dust filter if necessary.
Figure 15. Fans subrack alarms view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4.8 Equipment View alarms The alarm indications at Equipment level can be obtained, following the indication of the Equipment View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. Figure 16. shows the Equipment view, with the alarm indications presented: Fuse Failure (FF): AND Battery Failure (ABF): Substitute the fuse in the CONGI unit and search for a cause. Failure of the Service Power Supply connected to the CONGI Rack connector. Substitute the Termination BUS
Backplane Failure (BKF):
Specific Hardware Diagnostic (SHD): Indicate the presence of link failure between the MATRIX and one of the units; for details choose the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu.
These alarms can be observed at OS level.
Equipment alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 16. Example of Equipment View alarms and status
ED
01
957.140.602 V
5.4.9 External Points alarms (HouseKeepings) The alarms and status indications relevant to External Points (housekeepings) can be obtained, following the indication of the External Points chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. The external state represents the alarm state. On when the alarm is raised, else Off. If the external point is active (On), a red flag is represented near the state of the concerned point. In case of input point the alarm state is reported also in the user label column, by the box near its name: green color and sign > means nonalarmed condition. the change of color, as assigned by the severity (ASAP) > means alarmed condition.
Figure 17. Example of External Points alarms and status
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
40 / 52
6 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE

No particular indication is given as to spare handling which is left to the Maintenance Administration.
The replacement procedures are executed as follows: Hardware set the spare unit exactly as the unit to replace. Settings are specified in the MS documents. Here a layout figure indicates the exact location of all the setting arrangements and a table relate the operations to achieve with the settings. The cited documents are enclosed in the Technical Handbook. Simply replace those units not provided with any software settings With regard to the EQUICO unit refer to paragraph 6.1 on page 41. With regard to the ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit refer to paragraph 6.2 on page 43. With regard to the ATM MATRIX 8X8 unit refer to paragraph 6.3 on page 45. With regard to the IP MATRIX unit refer to paragraph 6.4 on page 46. When upgrading an equipment with New Hardware (for example MATRIXN unit) that substitute the old units (for example MATRIX unit), follow the indication given in paragraph on page . WARNING: In order to avoid shortcircuit, before substituting the CONGI unit, switchoff the relevant Station battery fuse breaker . Subsequently remove the Station Battery cable and extract the CONGI unit. WARNING: before inserting the new spare unit carefully check the integrity of the relative connectors. Dont insert the units that have been damaged during the transport/storing or in a phase before their replacing.
6.1 EQUICO unit replacement

Various procedures are utilized to replace a EQUICO faulty unit. They depend on the type of spares available: Spare without software installed. This is the normal condition. Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release identical to the unit to replace Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release differing from the one of the unit to replace, or belonging to other types of equipment or unknown.
CONGI unit version (read NOTE in Figure 18. on page 42) MIB store in the Craft Terminal or O.S.
The flowchart of Figure 18. on page 42 illustrates the procedures to follow for the EQUICO substitution.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults; when not possible this is indicated in the flow chart.
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Substitute EQUICO unit
HWPRESET THE NEW UNIT WITH: I11 OFF I12 ON (Reset Data Base) INSERT THE NEW UNIT

NEW UNIT HW CONDITION: software of the same release and NE NEW UNIT HW CONDITION: unit with different software NEW UNIT HW CONDITION: unit without software Download the NErelevant software release with normal dowload procedure. (see NE management section) Download the NE relevant software release with SIBDL procedure (see SIBDL section) REMOVE AND HW PRESET THE NEW UNIT WITH: I11 ON I12 OFF (Reset Data Base and upload Comm/Routing Tables) INSERT THE NEW UNIT AGAIN
NO
YES Is the MIB stored in the Craft Terminal? From C.T. send the saved MIB containing the correct configuration (NB1) (see NE management section)
From O.S. send the saved MIB containing the correct configuration (NB1) From O.S. Activate the sent MIB
From C.T.Activate the sent MIB
REMOVE AND HW PRESET THE NEW UNIT WITH: I11 OFF I12 OFF (Normal operating condition)
INSERT AGAIN THE NEW EQUICO END NOTES: NB2: The Comm/Routing tables are automatically retrieved NB1 only with CONGI starting from version 3AL 78830AAAC Otherwise the Comm/Routing tables must be configurated manually using the Craft Terminal
Figure 18. EQUICO unit replacement

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
6.2 ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement

Two different procedure are available for ATM MATRIX 4X4 substitution according to the EPS schema.
The flowcharts of Figure 19. on page 43 illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4 when it is not EPS protected. The flowcharts of Figure 20. on page 44 illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4 when it is EPS protected. The procedures aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults.
NOT EPS PROTECTED ATM MATRIX unit
Substitute the faulty unit with a spare ATM MATRIX
TO RESET THE DATA BASE HWPRESET THE NEW UNIT WITH: I14 ON
INSERT THE NEW UNIT AND WAIT UNTIL THE ACCESS WILL BE RETURNED TO THE C.T.
REMOVE AND HWPRESET THE NEW UNIT WITH: I14 OFF
INSERT THE NEW UNIT AND WAIT UNTIL THE ACCESS WILL BE RETURNED TO THE C.T.
From SMART application Restore The Data Base previously saved (see ATM OPERATORS HANDBOOK) or otherwise reconfigure all the ATM connections
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 19. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement without EPS protection
ED
01
957.140.602 V
ATM MATRIX unit EPS PROTECTED
FAILURE ON SPARE
FAILURE ON MAIN
Substitute ATM MATRIX unit
The Spare unit become active
END
Substitute the faulty uni
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 20. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection
ED
01
957.140.602 V
6.3 ATM MATRIX 8X8 unit replacement

Two different procedure are available for ATM MATRIX 8X8 substitution according to the EPS schema.
For ATM MATRIX 8X8 substitution can be applied the same rules used for ATM MATRIX 4X4 , so refer to flow chart of Figure 19. on page 43 and Figure 20. on page 44.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED 6.4 IP MATRIX unit replacement

For IP MATRIX unit replacement refer to the specific Operators Handbook.
01
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
46 / 52
7 UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE

In the next paragraphs is indicated the procedure to follow when upgrading an equipment with New Hardware . The new Hardware is identify by the N letter at the end of the acronym unit (for example MATRIXN is the new version, MATRIX without N is the old version). This procedure permits, if the equipment is EPS protected and inserted in a protected network (linear or ring protection), to maintain the system in service
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
7.1 MATRIX substitution with MATRIXN

According to the MATRIX EPS protection scheme different procedure are available: [1] Upgrading with a new MATRIXN EPS not protected Substituting the old MATRIX all the traffic is lost! [2] Remove the old MATRIX in slot 23 from the subrack Insert the new MATRIX into the subrack slot 23; on Craft Terminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the slot where the new unit has been inserted Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the acronym of the new unit ( MATRIXN) from the list, then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear
Upgrading with a new MATRIXN EPS protected Remove first the Standby MATRIX from the subrack Insert the new MATRIXN into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old MATRIX; a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the slot where the new unit has been inserted Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the MATRIXN acronym from the list then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear Force the EPS Switching to the Standby MATRIXN by selecting the Switch option from the EPS menu. For details see the paragraph Switching EPS in the NE MANAGEMENT section of this Handbook. After having verify that the MATRIXN (previously in Standby) is now working, remove the MATRIX unit (previously working) from the subrack. Insert the new MATRIXN into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old MATRIX; a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the slot where the new unit has been inserted Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the MATRIXN acronym from the list then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear The decision to force again the EPS MATRIXN switching to restore the original working condition is left to the operator.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
7.2 P4S1, S41, L41, L42, S161, L161, L162 substitution with P4S1N, S41N, L41N, L42N , S161N, L161N, L162N
During the substitution the traffic carried by the units will be lost if not SNCP or MSP protected In the following an example will be given substituting a P4S1 with a P4S1N; the same procedure can be applied to substitute the S41, L41, L42, S161, L161, L162 units respectively with S41N, L41N, L42N , S161N, L161N, L162N units. Remove the old unit( example P4S1 ) from the subrack Insert the new unit (example P4S1N) into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old unit; on Craft Terminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the slot where the new unit has been inserted Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the acronym of the new unit ( in our example P4S1N) from the list, then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 80755 BA AA
52
50 / 52
8 FLASH CARD SUBSTITUTION

The FLASH card used up to rel. 2.0A (80 Mbytes) requires to be replaced with one having a higher size (256 Mbyte) in order to manage the new SDH+ATM/IP services. N.B. Before to start with the FLASH card substitution ( flowchart of Figure 21. on page 52) execute the following instruction: a) Save the MIB as explained in Section 3 (NE MANAGEMENT), Paragraph Mib management of this Manual. Create and install the enhanced software package (SDH+ATM/IP) as explained in Section 3 (NE MANAGEMENT), Paragraph NE Software package installation Procedure of this Manual.
b)
The flowchart of Figure 21. on page 52 illustrates the procedures to follow for the FLASH card substitution without causing loss of traffic.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
Extract the EQUICO unit All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
SUBSTITUTE THE OLD FLASH CARD WITH A NEW ONE
HWPRESET THE EQUICO UNIT WITH: I11 OFF I12 ON (Reset Data Base)
INSERT THE EQUICO UNIT IN THE SUBRACK
Download the NE relevant software package with SIBDL procedure (see SIBDL section)
EXTRACT AND HW PRESET THE EQUICO UNIT WITH: (Reset Data Base and upload Comm/Routing Tables) I11 ON I12 OFF
INSERT THE EQUICO UNIT IN THE SUBRACK
NO
YES Is the MIB stored in the Craft Terminal? From C.T. send the saved MIB containing the correct configuration (NB1) (see NE management section)
From O.S. send the saved MIB containing the correct configuration (NB1) From O.S. Activate the sent MIB
From C.T.Activate the sent MIB
EXTRACT AND HW PRESET THE EQUICO UNIT WITH: I11 OFF I12 OFF (Normal operating condition)
INSERT AGAIN THE EQUICO IN THE SUBRACK END
NOTES:
NB1 NB2: The Comm/Routing tables are automatically retrieved only with CONGI starting from version 3AL 78830AAAC Otherwise the Comm/Routing tables must be configurated manually using the Craft Terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 21. FLASH CARD substitution
END OF DOCUMENT ED
01 SC.4:NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 80755 BA AA 52 52 / 52
957.140.602 V
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 SIBDL download procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment) . . 3.1.2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 11 11 11 11 12
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 1 / 16
957.140.602 V

Figure 1. SIBDL download procedure step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2. SIBDL download procedure step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3. SIBDL download procedure step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4. SIBDL download procedure step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5. SIBDL download procedure step 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6. SIBDL download procedure step 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7. SIBDL download procedure step 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 12 13 14 14 15
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 2 / 16
957.140.602 V

1.1.1 Document scope The SIBDL Manual describes the SIBDL application, used to download the NE software via Q or F interface. The SIBDL (Standard Image Binary DownLoad) procedure contains the following operative descriptions: Download with SIBDL. The complete procedure is indicated. See Chapter 2 on page 5 Configuration for SIBDL. Configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation are described. See Chapter 3 on page 11.
1.1.2 Target audience The SIBDL Manual is intended for all users. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook
1.2 Terminology
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 3 / 16
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 80755 BA AA
16
4 / 16
2 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL

2.1 Purpose of the procedure This procedure describes how to download a NE software with the SIBDL (Standard Image Binary DownLoad) program. 2.1.1 SIBDL download procedure Download with SIBDL program is performed in the following phases: Turn on phase, when activating the NE. Maintenance phase, when substituting the EQUICO unit with a spare, and the spare one doesnt contain software. ATTENTION: Download with SIBDL program put the EQUICO unit out of service regarding to the supervision and control function, while the traffic is not lost. It must not be executed to download a spare unit that contains software; in this case use the Download option of the EMLUSM, presented in the previous section. SIBDL tool permits to download the software towards the NE using the Q interface (Ethernet connection) or the F interface RS232 (serial line) of the NE . When using the Q interface the time necessary to the operation is reduced to some minute. WARNING: in Windows NT environment, it should have configured, before to use SIBDL: TCP/IP protocol, Protocol Service, TEL NET Accessory, defined by the NT Administrator. RAS (Remote Access Service) and Serial Cable Modem presented at chapter 3 on page 11.
in Windows 2000 environment, it should have configured, before to use SIBDL: N.B. TCP/IP protocol, Protocol Service, TEL NET Accessory, defined by the Administrator. Serial Cable Modem refer to paragraph 3.1.3 on page 12. RAS (Remote Access Service) is not necessary in Windows 2000 environment
To download with SIBDL execute the following steps: 1) Connect the Craft Terminal with the NE:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
when download by means of Q interface, always connect both the F and Q interface. when download by means of F interface, connect only the F interface.
2)
Start SIBDL, selecting Start > Program>Alcatel>SIBDLversion>SIBDL
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 5 / 16
957.140.602 V
3)
In the screen which appears (see Figure 1. ) with the command menu, select automatic mode command typing 8 and then ENTER.
Figure 1. SIBDL download procedure step 1 4) In the field source file at the bottom write the path name of the NE descriptor file (see Figure 2. ). The path name has typically the following format (see the example in the figure): <directory>/<NE name and release number>/<file descriptor> Note:In current release it is possible to download two types of file descriptor according to the following rules: 1) Create the NE software package as explained in the paragraph NE Software package installation procedure SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT of this Manual. 2) If the software to download manage only the SDH functionality, select the file descriptor in the directory 1660SM. (example: /ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.3.05/FTservices/data/1660SM/2.1b.09/1660.dsc) 3) If the software to download manage the SDH + ATM/IP functionality, select the file descriptor in the directory 1660SME (example: /ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.3.05/FTservices/data/1660SME/2.1b.09/1660.dsc)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
C:\ALCATEL\Q3CT_Pv1.3.05/FTservices/data/1660SME/2.1b.09/1660.dsc
Figure 2. SIBDL download procedure step 2
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 6 / 16
957.140.602 V
5) 6)
Press ENTER This step (see Figure 3. ) ask for the IP Address insertion. In the field NE_IP_address[ PPP TEL NET] at the bottom: with F interface: write PPP and press ENTER with Q interface: first possibility: write TELNET and press ENTER In next step which appears write the IP Address of the Craft Terminal second possibility: write the IP Address of the NE and press ENTER
ervices/data/1660SME/2.1b.09/1660.dsc
Figure 3. SIBDL download procedure step 3 7) This step ( see Figure 4. ) ask if the flash card must be formatted. Type y to format the flash card; as result of this action the program ask for a confirmation (see Figure 5. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 7 / 16
957.140.602 V
Figure 5. SIBDL download procedure step 5 8) Type y . The screen shows the automatic download evolution with a final message indicating the completed download (see Figure 6. ). On the contrary repeat the procedure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 8 / 16
957.140.602 V
9)
Press ENTER.
10 ) In the presented screen type 4 (see Figure 7. ) and ENTER.

Figure 7. SIBDL download procedure step 7 11 ) Extract and reinsert the EQUICO unit to complete the operation. 12 ) Extract and reinsert again the EQUICO unit to complete the operation. 13 ) Run the 1320CT application, execute Start supervision and NE login 14 ) From Craft Terminal ( EMLUSM view) execute the normal download procedure: N.B. Check that no RUTM alarm is present in the slot reserved to the main MATRIXN. If RUTM alarm is present means that the board type inserted in the subrack (typically MATRIXN in this release) and the board type software configurated (typically MATRIX) is not the same; under this condition the user must change the board type with the Equipment>Set menu. Select Init download from Download menu Select the SW package to Download and click on OK button In this condition the download is executed immediately. Select Unit info from Download menu Select the Software Package loaded as explained above and activate it Press OK to complete the operation
In this condition the download is executed immediately.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 9 / 16
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 80755 BA AA
16
10 / 16
3 CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL

3.1 Purpose of the procedure This chapter describes the configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation. 3.1.1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment) To install a new modem, the user should have administrator privileges and need the installation CDROM of Windows NT, then execute: Double click on My computer icon on the PC desktop and double click on Control panel icon; double click on Network icon; select the folder Services in the Network window and push the button Add: start the Select Network Service window; select Remote Access Service (RAS) in the dialog box; follow the instructions.
3.1.2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment To install a new modem, the user should have administrator privileges, then execute: Double click on My computer icon on the PC desktop and double click on Control panel icon; double click on Network icon; select the folder Services in the Network window; select Remote Access Service and push button Properties...; push the button add in Remote Access Setup window; push the button Install Modem in Add RAS Device window: start the Install New Modem window; put a tick against Dont detect my modem; I will select him from a list and push the Next > button; push the button Have disk...: start the window Install from disk; push the button Browse...; search the folder where SIBDL is installed (Alcatel / SIBDL version / SIBDL /)and select the file mdmalca.inf, after push the button Open; push the button OK in window Install from disk; select the modem named Serial cable in the dialog box of window Install New Modem and push the button Next >; put a tick against Selected ports and select only one port (the port must be available, i.e. not used by another RAS modem) and push the button Next >; follow the instructions; push the button OK in Add RAS Device window; push the button Continue in Remote Access Setup window; push the button OK in Network window;

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 11 / 16
957.140.602 V
3.1.3 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment To install a new modem, you should have administrator privileges; Double click on My computer icon on your PC desktop and double click on Control panel icon; Double click on Phone and Modem Options icon and select the Modems folder; Push the button Add: Add/Remove Hardware Wizard: Install New Modem window will appear; Put a tick against Dont detect my modem; I will select it from a list and push the button Next > ;
Figure 8. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Push the button Have disk...: the window Install from disk will appear; Push the button Browse...; Search the folder where SIBDL is installed and select the file mdmalca.inf, after push the button Open; Push the button OK on the Install from disk window; Select the modem named Serial cable into dialog box from Install New Modem window and push the button Next >; 01 SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 12 / 16
ED
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 80755 BA AA
16
13 / 16
Put a tick against Selected ports and select only one port (the serial port must be available, i.e. not used by another RAS modem) and push the button Next >;
Figure 10. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 3 The window Digital Signature Not found will appear: push the button Yes, and after the button Finish to end modem installation;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL 3AL 80755 BA AA 16 14 / 16
957.140.602 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V Figure 12. Serial Cable Modem configuration step 5
SC.5: SIBDL
At the end, the Phone and Modem Options window will display the installed modem
3AL 80755 BA AA
16
15 / 16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
957.140.602 V
SC.5: SIBDL
END OF DOCUMENT
3AL 80755 BA AA
16
16 / 16

1660SM31 Oper Ed01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1660SM31 Oper Ed01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

All rights reserved.

Alcatel 1660SM Rel.3.1

STM 16 Multiservice Metro Node

3AL 80755 BAAA Ed.01

3AL 80755 BAAA Ed.01

1660SM REL.3.1 C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

020520 DATE CHANGE NOTE

S.MAGGIO ITAVE C. FAVERO APPRAISAL AUTHORITY 1660SM REL.3.1

P.GHELFI ITAVE ORIGINATOR

C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 1 / 20

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 2 / 20

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 1.1 General information

1.2 Handbook applicability

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 3 / 20

1.3 Purpose of the handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 4 / 20

1.4 Handbook configuration check

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 5 / 20

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3AL 80755 AAAA

3AL 80755 DAAA

3AL 80755 BAAA

Provides 1660SM SDH Craft Terminal screens and operational procedures

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 7 / 20

Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW THIS HDBK or note

ANV Part No.

ATM Rel.1.1 Operators Handbook ATM Rel.1.2 Operators Handbook

3AL 80730 AAAA

3AL 80814 AAAA

Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures

ANV Part No.

IP Rel.1.0 Operators Handbook

3AL 81062 AAAA

ANV Part No.

FACTORY Part No.

1320CT Basic Operators Handbook [8]

3AL 79186 AAAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 8 / 20

FACTORY Part No.

Table 6. Documentation on CDROM See para. 5.5 on page 19

CDROM TITLE 1660SM Rel.3.1 CDROMDOC EN

ANV Part No. 3AL 80761 AAAA

FACTORY Part No. 417.100.064

1320CT BASIC CDROMDOC EN [12]

ANV Part No.

FACTORY Part No. 955.100.692 N

3AL 78901 AAAA

3AL 38207 AAAA

Handbooks REF.[16] and [17] are available only on paper support.

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 9 / 20

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SC.1:HANDBOOK GUIDE 3AL 80755 BA AA 20 11 / 20

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method